Multi Tech Systems Universal Remote RF300E User Manual
Remote Access Device  
Remote Access Server  
with V.90 Modems or  
Hybrid ISDN Ports  
Model RF300E and RF310E  
User Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 1 - Introduction and Description..................................................... 5  
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................... 6  
Preview of this Guide .................................................................................................................................. 6  
Front Panel........................................................................................................................................................ 8  
Back Panel ........................................................................................................................................................ 9  
BRI 1 (2 and 3) ........................................................................................................................................... 9  
Ethernet 10BASET ..................................................................................................................................... 9  
COMMAND ................................................................................................................................................. 9  
Power Connector ........................................................................................................................................ 9  
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 10  
Ethernet Port............................................................................................................................................. 10  
Command Port.......................................................................................................................................... 10  
WAN Links ................................................................................................................................................ 10  
Electrical/Physical ..................................................................................................................................... 10  
Requirement ............................................................................................................................................. 10  
Chapter 2 - Installation................................................................................. 11  
Safety Warning Telecom ................................................................................................................................. 12  
Unpacking ....................................................................................................................................................... 12  
Cabling Your RASFinder ................................................................................................................................. 13  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration..................................... 15  
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 16  
Before You Start Loading your Software ......................................................................................................... 16  
Network Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 16  
Call Control Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 17  
Data Control.............................................................................................................................................. 17  
Installing Your RASFinder Software ................................................................................................................ 18  
Setting Up Your Remote User Database ......................................................................................................... 25  
Filters ........................................................................................................................................................ 25  
Build User Database ................................................................................................................................. 27  
Setting Up Remote Access Dial In User Server (RADIUS) ............................................................................. 30  
Final Routing Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 32  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software ................................................................. 35  
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 36  
Before You Begin ............................................................................................................................................ 36  
Router Configuration ....................................................................................................................................... 37  
Typical Applications ......................................................................................................................................... 38  
RAS Applications ...................................................................................................................................... 38  
Router Application..................................................................................................................................... 49  
IP Setup .......................................................................................................................................................... 55  
Filters ........................................................................................................................................................ 59  
IPX Setup ........................................................................................................................................................ 61  
IPX Filters ................................................................................................................................................. 62  
Spanning Tree Setup....................................................................................................................................... 63  
WAN Port Setup .............................................................................................................................................. 65  
Point-to-Point Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 70  
Applications ..................................................................................................................................................... 71  
Diagnostics...................................................................................................................................................... 71  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 - Client Setup............................................................................... 73  
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 74  
Before you Begin............................................................................................................................................. 74  
Configuring in Windows 98/95......................................................................................................................... 75  
Installing TCP/IP (Win98/95) .......................................................................................................................... 82  
Configuring in Windows NT ............................................................................................................................. 83  
Installing TCP/IP (WinNT) .............................................................................................................................. 89  
Chapter 6 - RAS Dial-Out Redirector .......................................................... 91  
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 92  
Installing and Configuring the WINMCSI Modem-Sharing Software ............................................................... 92  
Running the WINMCSI Workstation Software ................................................................................................. 96  
Chapter 7 - Remote Configuration and Management................................ 99  
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 100  
Remote Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 100  
Modem-Based ........................................................................................................................................ 100  
LAN-Based ............................................................................................................................................. 102  
Remote Management .................................................................................................................................... 104  
Telnet ...................................................................................................................................................... 104  
Web Browser Management .................................................................................................................... 106  
Chapter 8 - Service, Warranty and Tech Support .................................... 109  
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 110  
Limited Warranty ........................................................................................................................................... 110  
On-line Warranty Registration................................................................................................................. 110  
Tech Support ................................................................................................................................................. 110  
Recording RASFinder Information .......................................................................................................... 110  
Service.................................................................................................................................................... 111  
About the Internet.......................................................................................................................................... 111  
Ordering Accessories .................................................................................................................................... 112  
Appendixes ................................................................................................. 113  
Appendix A - Cabling Diagrams..................................................................................................................... 114  
Appendix B - Script Language....................................................................................................................... 115  
Appendix C - Regulatory Information ............................................................................................................ 118  
Class B Statement .................................................................................................................................. 118  
Fax Branding Statement ......................................................................................................................... 118  
FCC Part 68 Telecom.............................................................................................................................. 119  
Ringer Equivalence Number ................................................................................................................... 120  
EMC, Safety and Terminal Directive Compliance ................................................................................... 120  
Appendix D - AT Commands ......................................................................................................................... 121  
Appendix E - TCP/IP ..................................................................................................................................... 162  
TCP/IP .................................................................................................................................................... 162  
Internet Protocol (IP)............................................................................................................................... 164  
Appendix F - Modem AT Commands............................................................................................................. 165  
Glossary of Terms ...................................................................................... 183  
Index ............................................................................................................ 197  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Access Device  
Chapter 1 - Introduction and Description  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Introduction  
Welcome to Multi-Tech's new RASFinder™, Models RF300E and RF310E, Remote Access Servers  
(RAS) for connecting telecommuters and mobile users to a corporate LAN. Both models provide 56K  
or ISDN remote server support for dial-out LAN users on IP or IPX networks and LAN security for  
dial-in connections with user name and password protection and callback security.  
The difference between the two models is the ISDN interface, model RF300E has the European and  
rest of the world (ROW) interface (S/T-Interface), model RF310E has the North America interface (U-  
Interface).  
The RASFinder has three hybrid ISDN ports with six integrated V.90/56K modems for dial-in and dial-  
out services, an Ethernet 10BaseT connection for local LAN users, and a command port for  
configuration.  
System management is provided through the command port using bundled Windows® based  
software which provides easy-to-use configuration menus.  
Figure 1-1. RASFinder Model RF300E/RF310E  
Preview of this Guide  
This guide describes the RASFinder and tells you how to install and configure the unit. The  
information contained in each chapter is as follows:  
Chapter 1 - Introduction and Description  
Chapter 1 describes the new hybrid RASFinder. Descriptions of the front panel indicators and back  
panel connectors are provided. A list of relevant specifications is provided at the end of the chapter.  
Chapter 2 - Installation  
This chapter provides information on unpacking and cabling your RASFinder. The installation  
procedure describes each cable connection starting with connecting the power cord, Command port,  
LAN and finally the WAN. The software installation process must be done through the Command  
port.  
6
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 - Introduction and Description  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration  
Chapter 3 details the software loading and initial configuration. Initially, the RASFinder software  
configures the unit for a Remote Access Server (RAS) configuration. If you want to configure the  
RASFinder for a Lan-to-Lan configuration, you will have to change the Remote Port Setup to a Client  
or LAN setting. The RASFinder can also be configured to operate in either a RAS application using a  
Radius server for security services or a RAS application using the proprietary Remote User Data  
Base Utility for remote user authentication.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
Chapter 4 describes the RASFinder software designed for the Windows® environment. The software  
contains a number of utilities that allow for downloading updated firmware, creating a proprietary  
Remote User Data Base, and a terminal emulation utility for configuring the internal modems. Three  
typical applications are provided to show you how the RASFinder can be configured and some insight  
into the application.  
Chapter 5 - Client Setup  
This chapter provides information for enabling and configuring multiple Windows 98/95 or NT® PC  
users for Internet access via the RASFinder.  
Chapter 6 - RAS Dial-Out Redirector  
Chapter 6 describes how Multi-Tech’s Remote Access Server for Microsoft network users enables  
them to dial out and fax out through the RASFinder. It provides information on installing and  
configuring the WINMCSI modem-sharing software.  
Chapter 7 - Remote Configuration and Management  
This chapter provides procedures for changing the configuration of a remote RASFinder located  
elsewhere on a LAN or at the other end of a modem connection. This chapter also describes typical  
Telnet client and Web-browser management of the RASFinder.  
Chapter 8 - Service, Warranty and Tech Support  
This chapter provides statements concerning the product warranty, provides space for recording  
information about your RASFinder prior to calling Multi-Tech’s Technical Support, and includes  
instructions for contacting Technical Support and returning your RASFinder to the factory if it requires  
service. Also included is information on how to obtain product support through the Internet.  
RF300E/RF310E  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Front Panel  
The front panel has four groups of LEDs that provide the status of the LAN connection and link  
activity. Two other LEDs indicate the general status of the RASFinder. The Ethernet LEDs display the  
activity of the LAN in whether the RASFinder is connected to the LAN, transmitting or receiving  
packets, and if a collision is in progress. The Link LEDs display the status of the three links that can  
be connected to the RASFinder and show whether a link is ready to transmit or receive serial data.  
The last two LEDs indicate whether the self test passed or failed and if the power ON/OFF switch on  
the back of the RASFinder is set to ON.  
Figure 1-2. Front Panel  
LAN  
LD  
TX  
LK  
RX  
TBD.  
Transmit Data indicator blinks when packets are being transmitted to the local area network.  
Link indicator lights indicating that the RASFinder is connected to the local area network.  
Receive Data indicator blinks when packets are being received from the local area network.  
BRI x  
RD  
Receive Data indicator blinks when the link is receiving data.  
Transmit Data indicator blinks when the link is transmitting data.  
Carrier Detect indicator lights when the link detects a carrier signal.  
Terminal Ready indicator blinks when the link is ready to transfer data.  
TD  
CD  
TR  
BOOT The BOOT indicator lights for 3 minutes when power is applied to the RASFinder; if it  
remains on for over 3 minutes, it indicates that a boot failure has occurred.  
PWR The power indicator lights when the On/Off switch is in the up (1) position.  
8
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 - Introduction and Description  
Back Panel  
All the cable connections for the RASFinder are made at the back panel. Three groups of cables (all  
using RJ-45 jacks) are used with the RASFinder: the Command Port, BRI 1 (2 and 3), and the  
Ethernet. The cable connections are shown in Figure 1-3 then defined below.  
10BASET COMMAND  
1
0
POWER  
BRI  
3
BRI  
2
BRI  
1
Figure 1-3. Back Panel  
BRI 1 (2 and 3)  
Each of these three RJ-45 jacks is used to connect the RASFinder to a WAN.  
Ethernet 10BASET  
The Ethernet 10BASET connector is used to connect the RASFinder to a LAN over unshielded  
twisted pair (UTP) cable. This connector is an RJ-45 jack.  
COMMAND  
The COMMAND connector is used to configure the RASFinder using a PC with a serial port and  
running Windows® software. The Command connector is an RJ-45 jack, and a short adapter cable is  
provided to convert to a standard serial port DB9 female connector.  
Power Connector  
The Power connector is used to connect the external power supply to the RASFinder. The Power  
connector is a 6-pin circular DIN connector. A separate power cord is connected between the power  
supply and a live AC grounded outlet.  
RF300E/RF310E  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Specifications  
The RASFinder conforms to the following specifications:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Routing Protocols - IP and IPX, and bridging for all others  
Ethernet LAN Interface - 10Base-T (twisted pair)  
Three ISDN BRI ports consisting of six V.90/56K modems or six ISDN modems  
Command port - 19.2 Kbps Asynchronous  
10BaseT Ehternet port  
Two 70-nanosecond 4 MB SIMMs (8 MB, total)  
(RAM is expandable to a maximum of 32 MB)  
Caution: SIMM speed and size cannot be mixed.  
•
1 MB of Flash memory (on two PROMs)  
Ethernet Port  
•
One Ethernet Interface - 10Base-T (twisted pair) RJ-45 connector  
Command Port  
•
Single 56.6K bps asynchronous Command Port using a short RJ-45-to-DB25 cable with a  
DB25 female connector  
WAN Links  
•
Six internal V.90/56K modems or six ISDN modems  
Electrical/Physical  
•
•
•
•
Voltage - 115 VAC (Standard), 240 VAC (Optional)  
Frequency - 47 to 63 Hz  
Power Consumption - 10 Watts  
Dimensions - 2.3" high x 8.4" wide x 6.1" deep  
5.8 cm high x 21.3 cm wide x 15.5 cm deep  
Weight - 1.6 pounds (790g)  
•
Requirement  
•
PC with Windows 9X/NT/2000, and one available serial COM port to connect to the  
Command port of the RASFinder  
*
Though this modem is capable of 56K bps download performance, line impairments, public  
telephone infrastructure and other external technological factors currently prevent maximum 56  
Kbps connections.  
10  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Access Device  
Chapter 2 - Installation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Safety Warning Telecom  
1. Never install phone wiring during a lightning storm.  
2. Never install phone jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed for wet  
locations.  
3. This product is to be used with UL and cUL listed computers.  
4. Never touch uninsulated phone wires or terminals unless the phone line has been disconnected  
at the network interface.  
5. Use caution when installing or modifying phone lines.  
6. Avoid using a phone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a  
remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.  
7. Do not use the phone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
Unpacking  
The shipping box contains the RASFinder, external power supply, cables, your Quick Start Guide,  
and the RASFinder CD with the RASFinder Software and User Guide in Adobe® Acrobat format.  
Inspect the contents for signs of any shipping damage. If damage is observed, do not power up the  
unit; contact Multi-Tech’s Technical Support for advice (refer to Chapter 8). If no damage is observed,  
place the RASFinder in its final location and perform the procedures in the section on Cabling Your  
RASFinder.  
Save the shipping box in case reshipment is necessary.  
Remote Access Device  
Tucows  
Remote Access Device  
.A  
.S  
M
U
A
IN  
D
E
D
A
E
M
IN  
U
.S  
.A  
Figure 2-1. Unpacking  
12  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 - Installation  
Cabling Your RASFinder  
Cabling your RASFinder involves making the proper WAN, Ethernet, Command Port, and Power  
connections. Figure 2-2 shows the back panel connectors and the associated cable connections.  
The procedures for connecting the cables to your RASFinder are provided below.  
Ethernet Connection  
10BASET COMMAND  
1
0
Power Connection  
POWER  
BRI  
3
BRI  
2
BRI  
1
WAN Connections  
Figure 2-2. Back Panel Connections  
Note: If additional RAM is needed, perform the procedure in the next section, Adding Additional RAM.  
The following steps detail the procedures for connecting the cables to your RASFinder.  
1
Connect the RASFinder to a PC using the short RJ-45 to DB9 (female) cable provided with the unit.  
Plug the RJ-45 end of the Command cable into the Command Port of the RASFinder and the other  
end into the PC's serial port. See Figure 2-2.  
2
3
4
5
Connect an RJ-45 (UTP) cable to the 10 BASE-T connector on the back of the RASFinder. Connect  
the other end of the cable to your LAN.  
Connect one end of a UTP cable to each of the BRI Connectors on the RASFinder (labeled BRI 1,  
BRI 2, and BRI 3) and connect the other end to a WAN jack (as shown in Figure 2-2).  
Connect one end of the power supply to a live AC outlet, then connect the other end to the  
RASFinder as shown in Figure 2-2. The power connector is a 6-pin circular DIN connector.  
Turn on power to the RASFinder by setting the ON/OFF switch on the back panel to the ON position.  
At this time your RASFinder is completely cabled.  
Proceed to the next section to install the RASFinder software.  
RF300E/RF310E  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
14  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Access Device  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Introduction  
This chapter covers procedures for loading the RASFinder software from a Windows PC (Win98/95  
or WinNT) and configuring your RASFinder. Configuration includes setting up the LAN and WAN port  
IP addresses, setting up the ISDN configuration default parameters, then downloading the default  
setup to the target ISDN RASFinder.  
Before You Start Loading your Software  
Consider the following choices before you configure your RASFinder and record your selections on  
the following pages; then refer to them while loading your software.  
Network Configuration  
ü Network Switch Type_________________________________________  
Select the network switch type your ISDN service provider uses at its local central office. You can set  
the RASFinder to NET3 (EuroISDN), or 1TR6 (German), AT&T 5ESS, DMS-100, or NI-1. If you do  
not know the switch type, you can get the information from your ISDN service provider.  
ü Data TEI_____________________________________________________  
The Data TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) is assigned to the data channel. You can select “Auto TEI,”  
a fixed TEI, number (from 0 to 63), or “Disabled.” A TEI is a number used by the central office switch to  
uniquely identify each device that is connected to the network. When it uses dynamic TEI assignments  
(Auto TEI), the central office switch assigns a TEI each time the RASFinder connects to the network.  
However, the ISDN service provider may assign a fixed TEI at subscription time, in which case you  
must configure the RASFinder with the fixed TEI number. You can also disable the channel, which may  
be useful when multiple RASFinders are attached to a network terminator bus.  
ü Voice TEI___________________________________________________  
The Voice TEI is the TEI assigned to the voice channel. You have the same choices as for the Voice  
TEI: “Auto TEI,” a fixed TEI number (from 0 to 63), or “Disabled.”  
ü Data SPID__________________________________________________  
The RASFinder must be configured with the Service Profile Identifier (SPID). The data SPID is  
assigned by the local phone company and is for the specific Basic Rate Interface (BRI) line to which  
the RASFinder will be attached. The data SPID string can have up to 20 characters. The data SPID  
is not used if the switch type is set to NET3.  
Note: For DMS-100 switches, any ASCII character except the underline (_) character is valid. For  
NI-1 and AT&T switches, only the digits 0-9 are valid.  
ü Voice SPID__________________________________________________  
The voice SPID is assigned by the local phone company and is for the specific BRI line to which the  
RASFinder will be attached. The voice SPID string can have up to 20 characters. The data SPID is  
not used if the switch type is set to NET3.  
Note: For DMS-100 switches, any ASCII character except the underline (_) character is valid. For  
NI-1 and AT&T switches, only the digits 0-9 are valid.  
ü Data Directory Number________________________________________  
The data Directory Number (DN) is a telephone number that is assigned to the RASFinder at  
subscription time by the ISDN service provider. The DN is a string of up to 24 characters; valid  
characters are 0-9, the * character, and the # character.  
ü Voice Directory Number_______________________________________  
The voice Directory Number (DN) is a telephone number that is assigned to the RASFinder at  
subscription time by the ISDN service provider. The DN is a string of up to 24 characters; valid  
characters are 0-9, the * character, and the # character.  
16  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration  
Call Control Parameters  
ü Persistent DTR Dialing_______________________________________  
A high DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal on the Command port indicates that your computer or  
terminal is ready to communicate with your RASFinder. DTR normally goes high when a  
communication program starts or is ready to dial. Persistent DTR dialing enables the RASFinder to  
automatically redial the number stored in memory location 0 whenever DTR is high and the serial port  
does not have an active call. You may enable or disable this feature.  
ü Calling Line Identification_____________________________________  
Identifies whether the two endpoints of a connection are enabled or disabled. Since RING  
messages only appear for ISDN data calls, the CLI feature does not define a means of conveying  
Calling Party information to the terminal for ISDN voice calls. The CLI information is only included  
with the first RING message for a given incoming call and appears as follows:  
RING  
FM: 5552000 TO: 5551000  
If the Calling Party Number information is not included in the incoming SETUP message, the RING  
message appears as follows:  
RING  
TO: 5551000  
If the Called Party Number information is not included in the incoming SETUP message, the RING  
message will appear as follows:  
RING  
FM: 5552000  
If neither the Called Party Number, nor the Calling Party Number is included in the incoming SETUP  
message, the RING message will contain no additional information.  
ü Auto Protocol Detection -  
Identifies that automatic protocol detection is enabled or disabled for an ISDN data call. The default  
setting is 1, which enables the Auto-Protocol Detection function.  
ü Auto Answer Data Calls ____ __________ Rings to Answer__________  
Select Auto Answer if you want your RASFinder to automatically answer all incoming data calls (this  
option does not affect the analog port). The Rings to Answer number, in the range of 1 to 255,  
selects the number of rings the RASFinder waits before answering an incoming call. The default is  
one ring.  
Data Control  
ü Data Protocol _______________________________________________  
The data protocol, also known as the B-channel protocol and the rate adaption protocol, is the  
“language” that is spoken over each 64 Kbps channel between two ISDN devices. The devices on  
both ends of the ISDN link must use identical data protocols.  
ü Dialing Method _______________________________________________  
Select either the “Enbloc” or the “Overlap” dialing method for use when establishing a data call. Your  
ISDN service provider determines the dialing method. The en bloc method is used for most ISDN  
dialing; however, you can select the overlap method if you are working with a private network.  
RF300E/RF310E  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Installing Your RASFinder Software  
The default application of the RASFinder is as a Remote Access Server equipped with a database of  
remote users for dialing into their corporate LAN. The RASFinder can also be configured to serve as  
a LAN-to-LAN router; however, this requires additional setup through the main menu after completion  
of the basic software installation process.  
Note: If you are configuring your RASFinder and loading software for North America (US  
Parameters), be sure you have Model RF310E (U-Interface).  
If you are configuring your RASFinder and loading software for European Parameters or Rest of  
World (ROW), be sure you have Model RF300E (S/T-Interface).  
1. Insert the RASFinder CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive on your local PC. The CD-ROM should start  
automatically; however, it may take 10 to 20 seconds for the Multi-Tech RASFinder Autorun screen to  
appear.  
2. If the Multi-Tech Installation CD Screen does not appear automatically, click My Computer, then  
right-click the CD-ROM drive icon and click Autorun.  
3. When the Multi-Tech Installation CD Screen appears, click the Install Software icon.  
4. The Welcome screen is displayed.  
Press Enter or click Next> to continue.  
18  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration  
5
The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed. Follow the onscreen instructions to  
install your RASFinder software.  
You can either choose a different Destination Location for your RASFinder software by clicking  
Browse, or select the default destination by clicking Next> or pressing Enter. It is recommended that  
you accept to the default location, c:\RF300E.100.  
6
When the Select Program Folder dialog box enables you to name the program group for the  
RASFinder icons. You can either select the default name, RF300E 1.00 or name it anything you like.  
Press Enter or click Next> to continue.  
7
The next dialog box enables you to designate the COM port of the PC that is connected to the  
RASFinder. On the Select Port field, click the down arrow and choose the COM port of your PC  
(COM1 -- COM4) that is connected to the RASFinder.  
Click OK to continue.  
RF300E/RF310E  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
8
The software is loaded onto your pc, then the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed.  
Click Finish to continue.  
9
The following message appears:  
10 Click Yes to download wizard setup. Clicking No prevents you from setting up the defaults and  
downloading them to the RASFinder; instead, you are returned to the program group.  
11 The Default Parameters dialog box appears. This dialog box enables you to assign the router name  
(required for IPX routing), establish the IP address, mask, and default route for the LAN port, enable  
or disable IPX routing, set up the remote addresses for the WAN ports, and disable any WAN ports  
not used.  
Router Name: If this is the only RASFinder on your network, you can use the default Router Name  
(MTROUTER); otherwise, you must assign a new Router Name in this field. The Router Name can  
be any printable ASCII string of up to 8 characters. The RASFinder will use this name to advertise its  
service in the IPX internetwork.  
The default LAN IP Address has to be changed to your unique LAN port address. In the LAN group,  
change the default Address to the value assigned to your LAN port. When you change the LAN  
Address, the remote WAN addresses also change to the same network and in sequential order.  
Change the default Mask to the value assigned to your LAN port.  
If you established a Default Route on your LAN, enter the address of the route.  
20  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration  
12 The following message is displayed.  
Click OK to proceed.  
13 The Writing Setup dialog box (with the current date and the file size in bytes) is displayed as the  
setup configuration is written to the RASFinder.  
14 Next, the Rebooting dialog box is displayed.  
15 Check to ensure that the BOOT LED on the RASFinder goes Off after the download is complete and  
the RASFinder is rebooted (the Rebooting dialog box goes away). This may take several minutes as  
the RASFinder reboots.  
16 You are returned to the Multi-Tech RASFinder Autorun screen where you can now install (on your  
PC’s hard drive) either Acrobat Reader (by clicking the Acrobat Reader icon) or the User Guide.  
To install the User Guide, click the Install Manuals icon, then click OK and the files will install at  
C:\Program Files\Multi-Tech Systems, Inc.\RF300E\Documentation unless you browse and select  
an alternate directory for installation.  
RF300E/RF310E  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
17 If you need to enter ISDN parameters, proceed to step 18.  
If you want at this time to set up your RASFinder as a RAS with the Proprietary user database,  
proceed to Setting Up Your Remote User Database section in this Quick Start Guide.  
If you want at this time to set your RASFinder so that a Radius server provides your user database,  
proceed to Setting Up RADIUS.  
If you want at this time to set up your RASFinder for LAN-to-LAN routing, proceed to the Final  
Routing Setup section.  
18 If you need to enter specific ISDN parameters (SPIDs) and DNs for North America, or data and voice  
ISDNs and subaddresses for European Parameters, click Start | Programs | RF300E 1.00 |  
RASFinder Configuration, or double-click the RASFinder Configuration icon in the RF300E 1.00  
icon group window when it is displayed on your desktop. The main menu (Router Setup) is  
displayed.  
19 From the Main menu, click the WAN button. The WAN Port Setup screen is displayed.  
22  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration  
20 Click the Advanced tab.  
21 Select (highlight) the WAN port you want to configure, then click Edit. The ISDN Parameter  
Configuration dialog box is displayed with the Config name window displaying the WAN port you just  
selected.  
22 Click the down arrow for Net Switch Type and highlight the switch type used by your Telco. If  
necessary, refer to your Network Switch Type entry in Before You Start Loading your Software. The  
default is NET3 (for EuroISDN). Available selections for the USA are: AT&T 5ESS, DMS-100, and NI-  
1. VN4 is for France, ITR6 is for Germany, and INS64 is for ISDN BRI (Japanese).  
23 Click the Data TEI field on the General tab. Refer to your Data TEI entry in the Network  
Configuration section in Before You Start Loading Your Software. If the Data TEI is different, click the  
drop-down list arrow and click the selection that corresponds to the Data TEI (i.e., Disabled, Auto  
TEI, or zero to 63) supplied by your Internet service.  
24 Click the Voice TEI field on the General tab. Refer to your Voice TEI entry in the Network  
Configuration section in Before You Start Loading Your Software. If the Voice TEI is different, click  
the drop-down list arrow and click the selection that corresponds to the Voice TEI (i.e., Disabled, Auto  
TEI, or zero to 63) supplied by your Internet service.  
25 Depending on the switch type chosen above, either the US Parameters group or the Europe  
Parameters group will be activated.  
If the US Parameters group is activated you may have to enter the SPID and Directory number(s)  
associated with the WAN port in the Config name window.  
A SPID (Service Profile IDentifier) is a number that is supplied to you by your local phone company  
which encompasses the phone number.  
A Data or Voice Directory Number (DN) is the phone number assigned to that B-Channel for the BRI  
line provisioned by your phone company. If a DN is assigned, then only the device associated with  
that WAN port will respond to the call.  
RF300E/RF310E  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
CAUTION: WANs 1 and 2 correspond to BRI 1. B-Channel 1 of BRI 1 corresponds to WAN 1, and B-  
Channel 2 of BRI 1 corresponds to WAN 2. The BRI line from the Telco has to be connected to the  
corresponding port on the RASFinder (e.g., BRI Line 1 has to be connected to BRI 1 port on the back  
of the RASFinder. The SPID and Directory Number (if used) for the BRI line assigned by the Telco  
have to be entered on the ISDN Parameter Configuration dialog box for the corresponding WAN  
number. WANs 1 and 2 are associated with BRI Line 1 and BRI 1 port on the back of the RASFinder.  
Each of these entries has to correspond to the way the Telco provisioned the line, or else calls will not  
go through.  
If the chosen switch type activates the Europe Parameters group, you may have to enter Data/Voice  
ISDN and Sub Addresses associated with the WAN port displayed in the Config name window.  
Enter the Data/Voice ISDN associated with the WAN port displayed in the Config name window.  
The Data and Voice ISDN numbers can be up to 20 characters in length. The Data/Voice ISDNs are  
assigned by your local phone company for the specific BRI line attached to the RASFinder. The BRI  
line has to correspond to the BRI port on the back of the RASFinder and the B channel of that line  
has to correspond to the WAN Port number; e.g., BRI Line 1 B-Channel 1 corresponds to WAN 1 and  
BRI Line 1 B-Channel 2 corresponds to WAN 2.  
26 When you have finished entering the Parameter information for your WAN port, click OK and you are  
returned to the WAN Port Setup dialog box; the ISDN TA Control group and the WAN number you  
just configured will be highlighted.  
27 Highlight the next WAN port you want to configure, then click Edit. Repeat steps 22 and 26 for each  
WAN port you need to configure.  
28 When all the necessary WAN ports are configured, click OK twice to return to the Main menu.  
29 At this time your RASFinder is operational.  
If you want to assemble your Remote User Database, proceed to the next section.  
If you want to setup your Radius, proceed to Setting Up RADIUS section.  
If you are setting up your RASFinder for routing, proceed to the Final Routing Setup section.  
24  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration  
Setting Up Your Remote User Database  
The proprietary Remote User Data Base supports remote dial-in users for user name, password, and  
port availability. Each dial-in user needs an entry in this database. You can add remote users, remove  
users, or edit information in the database.  
1
From your desktop, click Start | Programs | RF300E 1.00 | Remote User Data Base, or double-click  
the Remote User Data Base icon in the RF300E 1.00 icon group window (below).  
2
An Accounting Info - Read screen appears briefly, then the Users List dialog box is displayed.  
Filters  
Part of the database is the type of filtering that is applied to each user (e.g., filtering on an IP address  
or filtering on a specific protocol). These filtering conditions are established by clicking the Filters  
button.  
3
Click Filters to establish the filtering parameters for the remote user entry. the Filters List dialog box  
is displayed.  
Click the Add button.  
RF300E/RF310E  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
4
The Add/Edit Filters dialog box is displayed.  
5
Build your filtering parameters by filling in the following fields for each remote user.  
ID  
This field requires a unique filtering identification characterizing the type of filtering used. The ID can  
be up to 9 alphanumeric characters in length; examples are: Type 1, Server 1, Setup 1, etc.  
Default Action  
This drop-down list enables you to select either filter or forward. If you select filter, then the entry will  
be transmitted with filtering properties. If you select forward, you will still have to select a filter type,  
etc.; however, the entry will be transmitted without filtering properties. The default setting is filter.  
Filter Type  
The Filter Type drop-down list enables you to select the filter type. The filter types are either IP  
Address, Protocol, or Domain Name. The default setting for Filter Type is IP Address.  
•
IP Address – If the filter type is IP Address, enter the IP Address of the remote user in  
dotted-decimal format, then click the Add button to move it to the Existing Entries text box  
at the bottom of this dialog box.  
•
•
Protocol – If you select Protocol as the filter type, the IP Address text box changes to  
Protocol and Port drop-down list fields. Select either TCP or UDP from the Protocol drop-  
down list and select either Telnet, FTP, or SFTP from the Port drop-down list, then click the  
Add button to move these selections to the Existing Entries text box at the bottom of this  
dialog box.  
Domain Name – If you select Domain Name as the filter type, the IP Address text box  
changes to a Domain Name field. Enter the domain name consisting of a sequence of  
names separated by periods (dots) followed by an extension; e.g., “pictures.computers.com.”  
Click the Add button to move the domain name to the Existing Entries text box at the  
26  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration  
bottom of this dialog box. The domain name can be up to 39 alphanumeric characters  
including periods.  
Click OK to add the current entry to the Filters List dialog box, then repeat step 5 until all necessary  
Filter IDs are defined.  
6
When done, click OK again to return to the Users List dialog box, then click Download to save the  
filter entries to the RASFinder.  
While still at the Users List dialog box, click Add.  
Build User Database  
7
The Add Users dialog box is displayed.  
8
Build your user database by filling in the following fields for each user.  
User Name  
The User Name can have as many as 39 characters. All printable characters are permitted with the  
restriction that no blanks are allowed in the user name. In dial-in and dial-out applications, the user  
name is treated as a case insensitive string.  
User Password  
The User Password can have as many as 7 characters. In places where the password is used as a  
character string, it is treated as a case insensitive string. Elsewhere (PPPs CHAP), it is treated as a  
RF300E/RF310E  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
case sensitive pattern.  
Filter  
The drop-down list enables you to select a unique filter entry that was already defined in the ID field in  
the Add/Edit Filters dialog box.  
Call Back  
Click this check box to enable the Call Back function. If the user is at a number where he wants to be  
called, he can choose the specific number for call back. For this to work, the Call Back option must  
be enabled (activated) and the Call Back Security Enabled option must NOT be enabled (activated).  
The remote user would then use a standard PPP client or ASCII terminal to dial-in.  
To enable Call Back Security, you must enable (check) the Call Back option and fill in the following  
three boxes/fields.  
• Call Back Security Enabled  
This parameter is of use in dial-in applications where the user is always called back at a specific  
number. Enabling this parameter (Alt-S) lets the administrator assign the call back parameters. Leave  
this function disabled if the user is permitted to choose the call back number and the call back delay.  
• Call Back Number  
The Call Back Number is editable only if Call Back Security is enabled (checked). This is the number  
where the user will be called back. In this case, the user cannot choose the number where he wants  
to be called back.  
Note: You can enter the Call Back Number with or without dashes, the modem will ignore them if they  
are present.  
• Call Back Delay  
Call Back Delay is editable only if Call Back Security is enabled. This specifies the duration (in  
seconds) after which the user will be called back at the administrator-assigned number.  
Dial In Ports  
The systems administrator can enable (highlight) any WAN Ports 1 through 6 to be made available for  
dialing in to the RASFinder.  
Dial Out Ports  
The systems administrator can enable (highlight) WAN Ports 1 through 6 to be made available for  
dialing out from the RASFinder.  
Click the Rights button to assign user permissions for the remote user.  
9
The User Permissions dialog box is displayed.  
10 Build your user permissions database by filling in the following fields for each remote user.  
Auto Protocols  
This group enables the systems administrator to assign either unrestricted LAN/Intranet access or  
limited protocol access. The three available options are:  
28  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration  
• None  
This option (the default setting) gives the user unrestricted access to the LAN/Intranet.  
• Telnet  
This option allows Telnet sessions between the designated server (defined in the Host IP Address  
field) and the remote user. Telnet is an applications-level protocol commonly found in IP-based  
networks that allows terminal emulation at a remote workstation. If you select Telnet, you must enter  
an IP address in the Host IP Address field. This limits the user to only specific functions on the  
network.  
• RLogin  
This option allows the RASFinder to be used as an RLogin client for connecting to an RLogin Server  
(defined in the Host IP Address field). RLogin is an application protocol that provides a terminal  
interface between Unix hosts using TCP/IP network protocol. Unlike Telnet, RLogin assumes that the  
remote host is a Unix machine. If you select RLogin, you must also enter an IP address in the Host  
IP Address field. This limits the user to only specific functions on the network.  
Host IP Address  
Enter the IP Address for the Telnet or RLogin host computer (server). The Host IP Address must be in  
dotted-decimal notation format.  
Note: This field is enabled (activated) only when either Telnet or RLogin is enabled.  
Protocols  
The Protocols group enables you to limit the remote user to IP routing, IPX routing, or bridging  
(Spanning Tree); or, a combination of any two or all three routing protocols. The default setting is for  
all three protocols enabled.  
User Service Types  
The User Service Types group enables you to set the permissions for the entry being configured. The  
systems administrator can enable or disable the following options to customize the types of services  
for a particular remote user. By default, all permissions are enabled. To deny permissions to the entry  
being configured, click (check) the box to the left of the permission to disable the feature.  
•
•
•
Outbound Permissions - grants dial-out rights to remote user.  
Inbound Permissions - grants dial-in rights to user.  
Framed Protocol Permissions - grants the remote user framed protocol rights (e.g.,  
Framed Protocol – PPP). By enabling (checking) this option, the user becomes an  
unrestricted user (i.e., both framed and unframed protocols are allowed).  
•
•
Telnet Permissions - grants the remote user Telnet file transfer rights.  
RLogin Permissions - grants the remote user RLogin server connection rights.  
Time Limits  
The Time Limits group enables the systems administrator to impose various types of time-related  
restrictions on the user account.  
Time of the Day Logins  
The User Permission grid enables the administrator to deny a remote user Internet access at certain  
times during the week. This would be applicable when the administrator wants to bring a system  
down for a particular reason and doesn’t want users to access the Internet at that time.  
By default, all time periods are color-filled with yellow indicating that the remote user has permission  
to access the Internet all the time. To deny permission for certain periods of time, click all applicable  
yellow boxes over the target time range to toggle them to red (Access Denied).  
11 Click Add User to continue adding users to your database.  
12 After each user is defined in the Add Users dialog box and all the user permissions (Rights) are  
configured, click OK to display the updated Users List dialog box.  
13 Click Download to write the database to the RASFinder.  
RF300E/RF310E  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Setting Up Remote Access Dial In User Server (RADIUS)  
RADIUS is an optional security feature that uses a single authentication server to centralize security  
on networks with large modem pools, especially those with multiple communication servers.  
1. From your desktop, click Start | Programs | RASFinder 3.10 | RASFinder Configuration, or  
double-click the RASFinder Configuration icon in the RASFinder 3.10 icon group window when it  
is displayed on your desktop.  
2. The main menu (Router Setup) is displayed.  
Click PPP / SLIP to continue.  
3. The PPP Port Setup dialog box is displayed; click the Advanced tab.  
Click RADIUS to continue.  
30  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration  
4. The Radius Setup dialog box is displayed.  
5. Click RADIUS Enable to enable Radius security services for all ports on this RASFinder.  
6. Click Accounting Enable if you want Radius to track accounting information such as login and  
logout times, bytes sent and received, etc.  
7. Leave Allow Call if Security Server Down unchecked (disabled) to prevent users from logging in if  
the security servers are down.  
8. Click Assign Remote Address Using RADIUS to enable the Radius Server to automatically assign  
the IP Address of the WAN port on the RASFinder that the user will dial into.  
9. Obtain the Shared Secret from the Radius network administrator. The Shared Secret must be the  
same secret that is used on the Radius server whose address is being supplied for the Radius  
primary server address entry.  
10. Obtain the Radius server address from the Radius network administrator that will provide the security  
to the RASFinder. The Radius server address is to be enterred in the RADIUS Primary Server  
Address field.  
11. If additional servers are being used as backup servers, obtain their address(es) from the Radius  
network administrator and enter them in Backup Servers group. The first backup server address is  
enterred in the Backup Server Address 1 field. Any additional backup server addresses are to be  
enterred in the Backup Server Address 2 and Backup Server Address 3 fields.  
12. A set of default attribute values will be displayed in the Attribute Values group. These default values  
are used with the Multi-Tech Radius Server. You do not have to change these values if your  
RASFinder is communicating with Multi-Tech’s Radius Server. If you are using another vendor’s  
Radius Server to communicate with your RASFinder, you will have to communicate with your Radius  
Server network administrator to see how he/she has set up these attribute values and then change  
the default values to the values being used by that Radius server.  
13. Click OK when you are finished.  
RF300E/RF310E  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Final Routing Setup  
1. From your desktop, click Start | Programs | RASFinder 3.10 | RASFinder Configuration, or  
double-click the RASFinder Configuration icon in the RASFinder 3.10 icon group window when it is  
displayed on your desktop.  
2. The main menu (Router Setup) is displayed.  
Click PPP/SLIP button to continue.  
3. The PPP Port Setup dialog box is displayed.  
On the WAN tab, click Client or LAN in the Remote Port Setup group in the bottom right corner;  
this enables Client or LAN and disables the default, Client only. Select another WAN port you are  
using and repeat until ALL the WAN ports are switched to Client or LAN.  
32  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 - Software Loading and Configuration  
4. If you are going to combine the two WAN ports together, i.e., a single IP address, you need to enable  
the MLPPP option from the Advanced tab.  
Note: When the dialog box “When a PPP port is Client-or-LAN type:” appears, click on the OK button  
each time the dialog box appears. You are returned to the Main menu.  
5. From the Main menu, click on the IP button and the IP Port Setup dialog box appears with the  
Ethernet tab active and the Port Address displaying your LAN IP Address.  
Click on the WAN tab  
RF300E/RF310E  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
6. On the WAN 1 tab, change the Port Address and Remote Address groups to be on separate  
networks from the Ethernet LAN port.  
If you enabled MLPPP option on the PPP Port Setup dialog box, the IP addresses for all three WAN  
ports have to be identical and the remote WAN port addresses have to be within the same network  
and identical.  
If you did not enable MLPPP option, the WAN port addresses have to be on a different network from  
the LAN port address and have to be different from each other.  
7. Click on each of the WAN tabs and change the Port Address group and Remote Address group to  
conform with the settings for WAN 1.  
8. Click OK to return to the Main menu.  
9. From the Main menu, click Download Setup button to write your new configuration to the  
RASFinder. After your configuration is written to the RASFinder, you are returned to the Main menu.  
Your RASFinder is now configured for LAN-to-LAN routing.  
34  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Access Device  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Introduction  
This chapter describes the RASFinder software and explains how to make changes to the  
configuration of your RASFinder. The major configuration parameters were established during the  
loading of the software (Chapter 3). The RASFinder software and configuration utilities allow you to  
make changes to that initial configuration.  
The RASFinder software allows you to refine your configuration based on your network connections.  
The software is based on a main menu (RASFinder Setup) that allows you to consider all the  
parameters for a particular feature (e.g., IP or IPX protocol, Bridging, or setting up a WAN port for  
PPP or SLIP protocol). These features, along with others are discussed in detail in the RASFinder  
Configuration section later in this chapter.  
The other five configuration utilities offer additional functionality. The Download Wizard Setup  
guides you through the initial configuration and software downloading, as described in Chapter 3.  
Download Firmware allows you to download new versions of firmware when enhancements become  
available. The Configuration Port Setup utility allows you to change the method by which you  
access the RASFinder (i.e., direct connection of a PC to the Command Port on the RASFinder, or via  
your LAN port on the RASFinder). The Uninstall RASFinder Configuration utility is designed to  
remove the software from your PC. The WAN Device Configuration utility opens the Print Console,  
a terminal emulation program that enables you to confiure the built-in modems. The Remote User  
Data Base utility (supported through the command port) allows you to establish and maintain a  
database of information about your remote users. You can add and remove remote users, or edit  
existing user information in the database.  
Your RASFinder software includes the RASFinder on-line Help system. The Help is designed to be  
context sensitive. Clicking the Help button within a given dialog will provide definitions and  
recommended values for each button, option, and field for that dialog. In some instances, you will  
also be presented with a list of related topics that can be displayed by clicking the green, underlined  
text. In addition, you can search the entire Help system (via the Index tab) for definitions and  
references to specific terms, fields, and recommended values where applicable.  
Before You Begin  
The RASFinder software operates in a Microsoft Windows® environment. Your RASFinder RF300E  
1.00 program group, with all the utilities described above, is accessible by clicking Start I Programs I  
RF300E 1.00 I (utility), or by double-clicking the utility icon in the program group in My Computer  
(C:\Windows\Start Menu\Programs\RF300E 1.00). The program group is shown here:  
36  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
Router Configuration  
All changes to your RASFinder configuration are initiated through the Router Setup menu. The  
Router Setup menu consists of 13 buttons that enable you to display and change the protocol  
stacks, define the output of the RASFinder, perform network management functions, test the  
communications link, print messages received from the target RASFinder, and download setup  
information to the RASFinder.  
The two outer buttons in the bottom row are used to open the on-line Help system (RASFinder Setup  
Help) and end (Exit) a Router Setup session. The middle (Retry) button remains inactive until you fail  
to connect to the target RASFinder.  
RF300E/RF310E  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Typical Applications  
The two basic applications for the RASFinder are (1) as a Remote Access Server (RAS) to permit  
remote users to dial into a local area network and use the resources of that network and (2) as a  
Router for LAN-to-LAN routing. The RASFinder defaults to a RAS configuration during the initial  
software loading. Typical examples of both types of applications are presented in the following  
paragraphs.  
RAS Applications  
During the initial software installation, the RASFinder defaults to a remote access server (RAS)  
configuration. For example, the WAN Ports are connected to individual phone lines and the ports are  
then configured to answer incoming calls from remote locations. Two methods of identifying remote  
users are provided in the RASFinder; 1) Remote Access Dial In User Server (RADIUS) and 2) a  
Remote User Data Base utility in the RASFinder software. Finally, before the application is  
completely configured, the ISDN parameters have to be established for remote users can dial into the  
network.  
RAS Application Using Radius  
RADIUS is associated with a Radius server on the network which provides a security feature using a  
single authentication server to centralize security on a network. The Remote User Data Base utility  
identifies each user by user name, password and, if Call Back Security is enabled, a specific phone  
number the RASFinder must call to establish the connection with the remote user.  
LAN  
Workstation  
IP Address  
192.168.2.3  
User 1  
Network Printer  
IP Address  
192.168.2.4  
Phone  
881-3100  
716-5565 {0716556501}  
716-5466 {0716546601}  
716-5566 {0716556601}  
RASFinder  
IP Address  
192.168.2.10  
BRI 1  
BRI 3  
Workstation  
BRI 2  
User 2  
716-5467 {0716456701}  
716-5567 {0716556701}  
716-5468 {0716546801}  
Phone  
875-5000  
PSTN  
Workstation  
Workstation  
IP Address  
192.168.2.5  
User 3  
Phone  
944-7064  
Radius  
Server  
IP Address  
192.168.2.6  
Workstation  
Figure 4-1. RAS Application  
Before remote users can dial into the network, either the Radius security services have to be  
established, or each remote user must be idenfitied in the Remote User Data Base. Radius provides  
a single secure server for all remote users; whereas the Remote User Data Base utility identifies  
each user by User Name, Password, and a specific Call Back Number if Call Back Security is  
enabled. Radius and the Remote User Data Base have to have communication between the remote  
user and the administrator either for setting up the data base or the security services to establish a  
user profile. Radius also requires communication between the Radius administrator and the  
RASFinder administrator to set up the security features and the Radius server address.  
For a typical RAS application with a Radius server providing the network security, the Ethernet  
(10Base-T) port of the RASFinder is connected to the IP network, the Radius server is on the  
backbone of the network, and the WAN ports of the RASFinder are connected to individual phone  
lines. During initial software installation, the Default Parameters dialog box is displayed with both  
IPX and IP protocols enabled and a default Ethernet IP address and (subnet) mask displayed. For a  
38  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
RAS application using Radius on an Ethernet IP network, you would disable the IPX protocol and then  
change the default LAN IP address and mask to the unique IP addressing scheme for your network.  
The address assigned to the Ethernet port of the RASFinder can be any address that is recognizable  
by your network’s backbone.  
After you enter your LAN IP address information and six sequential WAN addresses have been  
automatically placed in the Remote address for WAN 1 thru WAN 6 fields, ensure that the Enable IP  
Routing on each WAN port is checked. This activates the WAN ports to receive calls from the remote  
users. At this point, the software will be downloaded to the RASFinder and then you will need to go in  
through the main menu to set up your ISDN connection to your Public Switched Telephone Network  
(PSTN) and Radius security services.  
To establish your ISDN connection with your local PSTN (either the North American version or the  
European version), you may have to enter some ISDN parameters, e.g., switch type used by the  
PSTN, SPIDs and Directory Numbers for North America or ISDNs and sub addresses for European  
and the Rest of the World (ROW). During the provisioning of the ISDN connection with your local  
PSTN, the local telephone company established some ISDN parameters for your local connection. A  
space is provided in Before You Start Loading your Software to document these parameters. Now, in  
order to load this informtion into your RASFinder, you need to bring up the Main Menu and click on  
the WAN button.  
From the WAN Port Setup dialog box, click on the Advanced tab to bring up the WAN Port Setup  
dialog box with the ISDN TA Control group highlighting wan 1. To establish your ISDN parameters,  
click on the Edit button and the ISDN Parameter Configuration dialog box is displayed.  
RF300E/RF310E  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
In the ISDN Parameter Configuration dialog box you can define the switch type used by the local  
telephone company, data and voice TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier), your US or European  
Parameters, Call Control Parameters, and Data Control.  
At a minimum, you will have to define the switch type and the TEIs and you may have to define the  
US or European Parameters if required by your local telephone company. Three switch types are  
defined for the US Parameters (DMS100, AT&T5ESS, and NI1), this covers the North American  
requirements. The European switch types are VN4 for France, NET3 for Euro, and INS64 for Japan.  
The data and voice TEI selections are disabled, auto TEI, or zero to 63. These parameters are  
determined by the local telephone company, so all you have to do is enter exactly what is provided in  
the your Before You Start Loading your Software listing.  
In our RAS Application example in Figure 4-1, the telephone switch at the local telephone company is  
a DMS-100 and the local telephone company provisioned the ISDN lines with a data and voice TEI of  
Auto TEI. This allows the local telephone company to dynamic assigned the TEIs each time a  
connection is made.  
Now, for the US or European Parameters which you may or may not have to enter, this depends on  
how the local telephone company is provisioning your ISDN connection. If the telephone company  
does not require this information, and the default Call Control Parameters and Data Control settings  
or OK, you would be done with your ISDN Configuration and ready to set up your Radius security  
services.  
40  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
But if your local telephone company requires either SPIDs and/or Directory Numbers for the US  
Parameters or ISDNs and Sub Addresses for the European Paramters, you will have to enter these  
fields for each WAN port on the RASfinder. A word of caution at this point with respect to entering  
this type of information, your need to ensure that these fields are filled in exactly as they are provided  
from your local telephone company, because the SPID and DN or ISDN and sub address have to  
correspond to the BRI line coming into the RASFinder and the WAN ports assigned to that BRI line.  
For if the SPID or ISDN is not on the same BRI line that is provisioned by the local telephone  
company, the call will not be completed.  
A SPID (Service Profile Identifier) is a 12-digit number that is supplied by your local telephone  
company which encompasses the phone number.  
A Data or Voice Directory Number (DN) is the telephone number assigned to that B-channel for the  
BRI line (telephone line) supplied to you by your local telephone company. If a DN is assigned, then  
only the device associated with that WAN port will respond to the call.  
In our RAS Application example in Figure 4-1, lets assume that telephone connection is being made  
for a US (North American) network. During the provisioning phase of setting up the local ISDN  
connection, the local telephone company assigned telephone number 716-5565 to the first B-channel  
for BRI 1 connection. This telephone number should correspond to Wan 1 in the ISDN Parameter  
Configuration dialog box. The SPID for the first B-channel is 0716556501. The telephone company  
also assigned telephone number 716-5466 to the second B-channel for BRI 1 connection. The SPID  
for the second B-channel is 0716546601. In our example application, the ISDN Parameter  
Configuration dialog box for the US Parameters would contain Data SPID of 0716556501 and Voice  
SPID of 0716546601. If you want either of these calls to be directed to the device connected to Wan  
1 or Wan 2 you would also enter the telephone number in the Data or Voice Directory Num field. So  
for example, if you wanted the Data SPID 0716556501 to be directed to the device on your network  
associated with Wan 1, you would enter telephone number 7165565 in the Data Directory Num field  
for Wan 1. If you wanted the calls directed to the second B-channel of BRI 1 to go to the device on  
your network that is associated with Wan 2, you would enter telephone number 7165466 in the Voice  
Directory Num field for Wan 1. When you have finished enterring the parameters for Wan 1, you click  
the OK button and you will be returned to the dialog box with the ISDN TA Control group. You would  
then change to the next Wan number to be configured in the ISDN Parameter Configuration dialog  
box. When you have configured all three of the BRI port or the ports connected to the local  
telephone company, you can begin setting up your Radius securtiy services.  
To enable the Radius security services, you need to establish communications between the Radius  
server and the RASFinder. The Radius security service options are defined on the Radius Setup  
RF300E/RF310E  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
dialog box. To provide vendor-specific configuration for the Radius server, you need to bring up the  
main menu, hit the PPP/SLIP button, and click the RADIUS button in the PPP Port Setup dialog box.  
The Radius Setup dialog box enables the RADIUS option, establishes accounting, enables call if  
security server is down, assigns a remote address using the RADIUS, provides a window for the  
shared secret, and indicates the primary RADIUS server IP address. The new vendor specific  
attributes and services that you establish for the RASFinder can not conflict with any standard Radius  
attributes or any other custom attributes on the Radius Security Server. The Enable RADIUS option  
enables communication between the Radius server and the RASFinder. Enable Accounting option  
activates the accounting features which allow the Radius server to track the number of bytes sent  
and received, login and logout times, port number, etc. The Allow Call If Security Server Down feature  
can be used when the Remote User Data Base Utility is used as a backup database to the Radius  
security services. The Assign Remote Address Using RADIUS feature enables the Radius server to  
take over the addressing scheme of the WAN ports on the RASFinder.  
The Shared Secret is an entry that must be obtained from the Radius network administrator and must  
be the same as is used on the Radius security server. The RADIUS Primary Server Address is the IP  
address of the Radius security server and in our typical RAS application, this address is 192.168.2.6.  
If one or more backup Radius servers are used in your network, then their IP addresses need to be  
entered in the Backup Server Address 1, 2, and/or 3 fields.  
The Attribute Values Group at the bottom of the Radius Setup dialog box have default values for  
each of the three attributes and two services.  
The three new attributes are vendor-specific attributes and may have to be added to the Radius  
server dictionary. The first attribute is Callback-Delay with a value of 224. The Radius server is set up  
with a delay time for calling back the remote user. The Remote User Enter Number Attribute Value  
has a value of 225. This attribute specifies a telephone number of where a remote user can be called  
back if he/she is not at their usual telephone number provided in their user profile. The remote user  
would have to give that new phone number to the Radius network administrator so the RASFinder  
will know that the remote user is at a different phone from the one in their user profile.  
The Protocol Permissions Attribute has a value of 226 and the values associated with the attribute  
are “1” for IP, “2” for IPX, and “3” for Spanning Tree.  
The Inbound User Service Type Attribute has a value of “10” and an associated value of “6”. This  
attribute enables the remote user to have inbound access to the network only; in other words, this  
attribute adds inbound access to the remote user’s profile.  
42  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
The Shell User Service Type Attribute has a value of “11” and also an associated value of ”6”.  
After these new attributes are added to the Radius server and the user profile is established, a  
remote user (in our typical RAS application with Radius, Remote User 1, for example) could call into  
the RASFinder and identify themselves by their user name and password. Remote User 1, in our  
typical application, can initiate a dialup session by entering their User name and password in the Dial-  
Up Networking (My Connection) dialog box and the phone number of the WAN port on the  
RASFinder that User 1 is going to be connected to. In this application, remote user 1 could dial 716-  
5565 to connect to WAN port number one on the RASFinder.  
At this point, Remote User 1 has access to the services on the LAN. For instance, if he/she wanted  
to print a report, it could be sent to the printer and printed out as if Remote User 1 was on the local  
area network.  
RAS Application using Remote User Data Base  
The initial software loading process would be the same as for the RAS application using Radius,  
except that now instead of setting up Radius parameters, you will assemble a Remote User Data  
Base. A typical RAS application using the Remote User Data Base is shown in Figure 4-2.  
LAN  
Workstation  
IP Address  
192.168.2.3  
User 1  
Network Printer  
IP Address  
192.168.2.4  
716-5565 {0716556501}  
Phone  
881-3100  
192.168.2.11  
716-5466 {0716546601}  
192.168.2.12  
BRI 1  
RASFinder  
IP Address  
192.168.2.10  
Workstation  
716-5566 {0716556601}  
192.168.2.13  
BRI 2  
User 2  
716-5467 {0716456701}  
Phone  
875-5000  
PSTN  
192.168.2.14  
716-5567 {0716556701}  
192.168.2.15  
716-5468 {0716546801}  
Workstation  
Workstation  
IP Address  
192.168.2.5  
BRI 3  
192.168.2.16  
User 3  
Phone  
944-7064  
Novell File  
Server  
IP Address  
192.168.2.6  
Workstation  
Figure 4-2. RAS Application using Remote User Data Base  
During the software loading process when the Default Parameters dialog box is displayed, both IPX  
and IP protocols are enabled and a default Ethernet IP address and (subnet) mask are displayed in  
the IP LAN group. For this RAS application, you would disable the IPX protocol and then change the  
default LAN IP address and mask to the unique IP addressing scheme for your network. The address  
assigned to your RASFinder’s Ethernet port can be any address that is recognizable by your  
RF300E/RF310E  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
network’s backbone.  
In this typical RAS application, the IP network address is 192.168.2.xxx. For the purpose of this  
discussion, we are assigning the IP address 192.168.2.10 to the Ethernet port on the RASFinder.  
After this address is entered into the IP Address field of the Default Parameters dialog box, the next  
six sequential IP addresses (192.168.2.11 thru 192.168.2.16) are assigned to the WAN ports. These  
six IP addresses, in the same network (with the Ethernet LAN), are associated with the respective  
WAN ports so that when the remote users dial into the WAN port, they always appear (to the rest of  
the IP network) at these respective addresses.  
At this point, the software will be downloaded to the RASFinder and then you will need to go in  
through the main menu to set up your ISDN connection to your Public Switched Telephone Network  
(PSTN) and then establish your remote user data base.  
To establish your ISDN connection with your local PSTN (either the North American version or the  
European version), you may have to enter some ISDN parameters, e.g., switch type used by the  
PSTN, SPIDs and Directory Numbers for North America or ISDNs and sub addresses for European  
and the Rest of the World (ROW). During the provisioning of the ISDN connection with your local  
PSTN, the local telephone company established some ISDN parameters for your local connection. A  
space is provided in Before You Start Loading your Software to document these parameters. Now, in  
order to load this informtion into your RASFinder, you need to bring up the Main Menu and click on  
the WAN button.  
From the WAN Port Setup dialog box, click on the Advanced tab to bring up the WAN Port Setup  
dialog box with the ISDN TA Control group highlighting wan 1. To establish your ISDN parameters,  
click on the Edit button and the ISDN Parameter Configuration dialog box is displayed.  
44  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
In the ISDN Parameter Configuration dialog box you can define the switch type used by the local  
telephone company, data and voice TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier), your US or European  
Parameters, Call Control Parameters, and Data Control.  
At a minimum, you will have to define the switch type and the TEIs and you may have to define the  
US or European Parameters if required by your local telephone company. Three switch types are  
defined for the US Parameters (DMS100, AT&T5ESS, and NI1), this covers the North American  
requirements. The European switch types are VN4 for France, NET3 for Euro, and INS64 for Japan.  
The data and voice TEI selections are disabled, auto TEI, or zero to 63. These parameters are  
determined by the local telephone company, so all you have to do is enter exactly what is provided in  
the your Before You Start Loading your Software listing.  
In our RAS Application example in Figure 4-2, the telephone switch at the local telephone company is  
a DMS-100 and the local telephone company provisioned the ISDN lines with a data and voice TEI of  
Auto TEI. This allows the local telephone company to dynamic assigned the TEIs each time a  
connection is made.  
Now, for the US or European Parameters which you may or may not have to enter, this depends on  
how the local telephone company is provisioning your ISDN connection. If the telephone company  
does not require this information, and the default Call Control Parameters and Data Control settings  
or OK, you would be done with your ISDN Configuration and ready to set up your Radius security  
RF300E/RF310E  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
services.  
But if your local telephone company requires either SPIDs and/or Directory Numbers for the US  
Parameters or ISDNs and Sub Addresses for the European Paramters, you will have to enter these  
fields for each WAN port on the RASfinder. A word of caution at this point with respect to entering this  
type of information, your need to ensure that these fields are filled in exactly as they are provided  
from your local telephone company, because the SPID and DN or ISDN and sub address have to  
correspond to the BRI line coming into the RASFinder and the WAN ports assigned to that BRI line.  
For if the SPID or ISDN is not on the same BRI line that is provisioned by the local telephone  
company, the call will not be completed.  
A SPID (Service Profile Identifier) is a 12-digit number that is supplied by your local telephone  
company which encompasses the phone number.  
A Data or Voice Directory Number (DN) is the telephone number assigned to that B-channel for the  
BRI line (telephone line) supplied to you by your local telephone company. If a DN is assigned, then  
only the device associated with that WAN port will respond to the call.  
In our RAS Application example in Figure 4-2, lets assume that telephone connection is being made  
for a US (North American) network. During the provisioning phase of setting up the local ISDN  
connection, the local telephone company assigned telephone number 716-5565 to the first B-channel  
for BRI 1 connection. This telephone number should correspond to Wan 1 in the ISDN Parameter  
Configuration dialog box. The SPID for the first B-channel is 0716556501. The telephone company  
also assigned telephone number 716-5466 to the second B-channel for BRI 1 connection. The SPID  
for the second B-channel is 0716546601. In our example application, the ISDN Parameter  
Configuration dialog box for the US Parameters would contain Data SPID of 0716556501 and Voice  
SPID of 0716546601. If you want either of these calls to be directed to the device connected to Wan  
1 or Wan 2 you would also enter the telephone number in the Data or Voice Directory Num field. So  
for example, if you wanted the Data SPID 0716556501 to be directed to the device on your network  
associated with Wan 1, you would enter telephone number 7165565 in the Data Directory Num field  
for Wan 1. If you wanted the calls directed to the second B-channel of BRI 1 to go to the device on  
your network that is associated with Wan 2, you would enter telephone number 7165466 in the Voice  
Directory Num field for Wan 1. When you have finished enterring the parameters for Wan 1, you click  
the OK button and you will be returned to the dialog box with the ISDN TA Control group. You would  
then change to the next Wan number to be configured in the ISDN Parameter Configuration dialog  
box. When you have configured all three of the BRI port or the ports connected to the local telephone  
company, you can begin setting up your Radius securtiy services.  
46  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
Before remote users can dial into the network, a user profile has to be set up in the proprietary  
remote user database using the Remote User Data base utility. This data base utility is provided with  
the RASFinder software. The RASFinder network administrator builds this database by adding  
information (for one remote user at a time) via the Add Users dialog box. The user name and  
password in this application must be negotiated between the RASFinder administrator and each  
remote user.  
User names can be up to 39 characters long, with any printable characters; however, no spaces are  
allowed within the names. In our dialog box (above), we are using the User Name “User2.” The  
letters will appear as all caps in the Users List; however, dial-in applications will treat the user names  
as case-insensitive strings, enabling the users to enter their user names as all uppercase, all  
lowercase, or a mixture of uppercase and lowercase.  
A User Password of up to 7 characters should be given each user. In the Call Back group, the Call  
Back option should be enabled (checked) for security purposes. If ONLY this option is checked, the  
remote user would be asked to supply the callback numbers when they dial into the RASFinder. If  
Call Back Security Enabled is also checked, the administrator controls the callback numbers through  
the Call Back Number field. In our typical application, User 2’s phone number is 875-5000; therefore,  
we enter this number in the Call Back Number field. In the Dial In Ports, we have assigned User2 to  
WAN Port 2 with phone number 716-5466 assigned to it. This phone number will have to be entered  
in the Phone Number field on remote User 2’s dial-up networking (My Connection) dialog box.  
After the Add Users dialog box is filled in, you need to click the Rights button which brings up the  
User Permissions dialog box.  
The User Permissions dialog box enables you to assign protocol’s, user service type(s), time limits,  
and time of day for each user to login. The Auto Protocols allow for no auto login, login via Telnet, or  
RF300E/RF310E  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
RLogin and then direct the remote user to a specific host. The User Service Types defines how the  
remote user is going to be allowed to use the network. For example, a remote user could be allowed  
Inbound Permissions using Telnet, or Inbound using Rlogin. The time of day and days in which the  
user can access the network are the final items in the User Permissions dialog box. Once this is  
established for each user and the user database is loaded into the RASFinder, all the remote users  
can dial into the network and access the network resources according to the restrictions/permissions  
on this dialog box.  
For example, Remote User2 (in our typical application) could initiate a dialup session by merely  
entering their User name and password in the Dial-Up Networking (My Connection) dialog box (see  
below) after having first set up a New Connection (called “My Connection”) and entering the phone  
number of RASFinder WAN port 2 (716-5466), which is assigned to User2.  
Once Remote User2 has connected and been authenticated, they have access to the services on the  
LAN. For instance, if he/she wanted to print a report, it could be sent to the printer and printed out just  
as if Remote User2 was on the local area network.  
48  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
Router Application  
The second basic application for the RASFinder is LAN-to-LAN routing as shown in Figure 4-3. The  
RASFinder is initially configured for a RAS application. To configure the RASFinder for a router  
application, you have to change the WAN port addresses to be on a different network from the LAN  
port. The remote WAN ports have to be on the same network as the local WAN ports. You would  
have to change the Remote Port setup from a RAS application (Client only) to a routing application  
(Client or LAN). If your routing application would benefit from having the B-channels of a BRI line tied  
together to double your Wan speed, then you would have to enable the MultiLink Point-to-point  
(MLPPP) option. Finally, before you can route between LANs you would have to establish the ISDN  
parameters for the BRI line connecting the RASFinder to the Public Switched Telephone Network  
(PSTN).  
LAN  
Remote Office  
Workstation  
IP Address  
192.168.2.3  
LAN  
Workstation  
IP Address  
200.2.9.5  
Network Printer  
IP Address  
192.168.2.4  
RASFinder  
IP Address  
192.168.2.1  
716-5566 {0716556601}  
192.168.4.10  
881-3200 {0881320001}  
192.168.4.20  
Network Printer  
IP Address  
200.2.9.6  
IP Address  
200.2.9.1  
BRI 1  
BRI 1  
716-5467 {0716456701}  
192.168.4.10  
PSTN  
881-3201 {0881320101}  
192.168.4.20  
Workstation  
IP Address  
192.168.2.5  
Workstation  
IP Address  
200.2.9.7  
Workstation  
IP Address  
200.2.9.8  
Novell File  
Server  
IP Address  
192.168.2.6  
Figure 4-3. Router Application  
During initial software loading, you begin to configure the RASFinder for a routing application. A  
typical routing application is shown in Figure 4-3 and will be used as an example in the following  
discussion.  
When you changed your LAN IP address in the Default Parameters dialog box to your unique LAN  
addressing structure, the Remote Addresses in the WAN group will change to sequential addresses  
of the LAN port which will not work in a routing application. The initial setup of the software defaults  
RF300E/RF310E  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
to a RAS application. The Default Parameters dialog box will not allow you to change the addressing  
scheme of the remote WAN ports to your unique addressing structure for your routing application.  
Therefore, you have to leave the Default Parameters dialog box set up for a RAS application initially  
(during initial software installation and configuration); then later, from the main menu, you can switch  
your associated WAN ports from a RAS application to a routing application.  
At this point, the software will be downloaded to the RASFinder and then you will need to go in  
through the main menu to change the Remote Port setup group from a Client Only (RAS application)  
to Client or LAN option for the WAN ports you need for routing, then you will be able to change those  
WAN ports to a different network address than your LAN port, and finally, set up your ISDN  
parameters for the BRI line connecting the RASFinder to the PSTN.  
Before you can change your Wan ports to a different network than the LAN port, you have to click on  
the PPP/SLIP (Point-to-Point/Serial Line Internet Protocol) button on the Main menu and the PPP  
Port Setup dialog box is displayed with the WAN 1 active. In the Remote Port Setup group in the  
lower right of the dialog box, change from the Client only option to the Client or LAN; this disables  
RAS, and enables the RASFinder to communicate with either a remote client (PC) or a LAN for  
routing. The WANs group must have the Client or LAN enabled for each of the ports that are  
providing routing.  
50  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
Now, you can decide if you want the B-channels of the BRI line bonded together or if you want each  
B-channel to act alone. To bond the two B-channels of a BRI line together, you click on the Advanced  
tab and esure that MLPPP (MultiLink Point-to-Point Protocol) option is active.  
If you were to bond BRI 1 line in our Router application in Figure 4-3, you would have to change the  
IP addresses (WAN 1 from 192.168.2.2 and WAN 2 from 192.168.2.3 on the Corporate LAN to the  
same IP address, for example, you could use 192.168.4.10 for both B-channels. At the remote office  
LAN you would then have to change BRI 1 line to say 192.168.4.20.  
Now, to configure the RASFinder for the routing application as shown in Figure 4-3 and bonding the  
B-channels together, you need to click on the IP button on the Main Menu. The IP Port Setup dialog  
box is displayed with the Ethernet tab active showing your LAN IP address.  
Next, you need to click on the WAN tab to display the Port Address and Remote Address groups for  
WAN 1. Wan 1 is highlighted in the List of WAN ports on the right side of the dialog box. The default  
WAN IP addresses will be displayed in the dialog box that were set up during the software loading  
and initial configuration of the RASFinder. But, now you can change these addresses to fit your  
routing application. Above I stated that we could bond the B-channels together, so here is where we  
enter that information. For the Corporate LAN with the B-channels of BRI 1 bonded together and an  
IP address of 192.168.4.10, you would enter this in the IP Address field for the Port Address group.  
Set up your IP Mask accordingly, and then enter your IP Address for the Remote Office in the IP  
Address field of the Remote Address group (192.168.4.20).  
RF300E/RF310E  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Now, you can click on WAN 2 and enter the same information for the Port and Remote Address  
groups. This will bond the two B-channels of BRI 1 together.  
To set up the remote office LAN, go through the same process except point the WAN ports toward  
the Corporate LAN. The remote WAN ports could be set up with an IP address of 192.168.4.20.  
Now to establish your ISDN connection with your local PSTN (either the North American version or  
the European version), you may have to enter some ISDN parameters, e.g., switch type used by the  
PSTN, SPIDs and Directory Numbers for North America or ISDNs and sub addresses for European  
and the Rest of the World (ROW). During the provisioning of the ISDN connection with your local  
PSTN, the local telephone company established some ISDN parameters for your local connection. A  
space is provided in Before You Start Loading your Software to document these parameters. Now, in  
order to load this informtion into your RASFinder, you need to bring up the Main Menu and click on  
the WAN button.  
From the WAN Port Setup dialog box, click on the Advanced tab to bring up the WAN Port Setup  
dialog box with the ISDN TA Control group highlighting WAN 1. To establish your ISDN parameters,  
click on the Edit button and the ISDN Parameter Configuration dialog box is displayed.  
52  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
In the ISDN Parameter Configuration dialog box you can define the switch type used by the local  
telephone company, data and voice TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier), your US or European  
Parameters, Call Control Parameters, and Data Control.  
At a minimum, you will have to define the switch type and the TEIs and you may have to define the  
US or European Parameters if required by your local telephone company. Three switch types are  
defined for the US Parameters (DMS100, AT&T5ESS, and NI1), this covers the North American  
requirements. The European switch types are VN4 for France, NET3 for Euro, and INS64 for Japan.  
The data and voice TEI selections are disabled, auto TEI, or zero to 63. These parameters are  
determined by the local telephone company, so all you have to do is enter exactly what is provided in  
your Before You Start Loading your Software listing.  
In our Router Application example in Figure 4-3, the telephone switch at the local telephone company  
is a DMS-100 and the local telephone company provisioned the ISDN lines with a data and voice TEI  
of Auto TEI. This allows the local telephone company to dynamic assigned the TEIs each time a  
connection is made.  
Now, for the US or European Parameters which you may or may not have to enter, this depends on  
how the local telephone company is provisioning your ISDN connection. If the telephone company  
does not require this information, and the default Call Control Parameters and Data Control settings  
are OK, you would be done with your ISDN Configuration and ready to start your routing.  
RF300E/RF310E  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
But, if your local telephone company requires either SPIDs and/or Directory Numbers for the US  
Parameters or ISDNs and Sub Addresses for the European Paramters, you will have to enter these  
fields for each WAN port on the RASfinder. A word of caution at this point with respect to entering  
this type of information, your need to ensure that these fields are filled in exactly as they are provided  
from your local telephone company, because the SPID and DN or ISDN and sub address have to  
correspond to the BRI line coming into the RASFinder and the WAN ports assigned to that BRI line.  
For if the SPID or ISDN is not on the same BRI line that is provisioned by the local telephone  
company, the call will not be completed.  
A SPID (Service Profile Identifier) is a number supplied by your local telephone company which  
encompasses the phone number.  
A Data or Voice Directory Number (DN) is the telephone number assigned to that B-channel for the  
BRI line (telephone line) supplied by your local telephone company. If a DN is assigned, then only  
the device associated with that WAN port will respond to the call.  
In our Router Application example in Figure 4-3, lets assume that telephone connection is being  
made for a US (North American) network. During the provisioning phase of setting up the local ISDN  
connection, the local telephone company used telephone number 716-5565 for WAN 1 of BRI 1. This  
telephone number should correspond to Wan 1 in the ISDN Parameter Configuration dialog box.  
The SPID for the first B-channel (WAN 1) could be 0716556501. The telephone company also used  
telephone number 716-5466 for the second B-channel (WAN 2) of BRI 1. The SPID for the second  
B-channel could be 0716546601. In our example application, the ISDN Parameter Configuration  
dialog box for the US Parameters would contain Data SPID of 0716556501 and Voice SPID of  
0716546601. If you want either of these calls to be connected to Wan 1 or Wan 2 you would also  
enter the telephone number in the Data or Voice Directory Num field. So for example, if you wanted  
the Data SPID 0716556501 to be directed to Wan 1, you would enter telephone number 7165565 in  
the Data Directory Num field for Wan 1. If you wanted the calls directed to the second B-channel of  
BRI 1 to go to Wan 2, you would enter telephone number 7165466 in the Voice Directory Num field  
for Wan 2. When you have finished enterring the parameters for Wan 1, you click the OK button and  
you will be returned to the dialog box with the ISDN TA Control group. You would then change to  
WAN 2 and configure the ISDN Parameter Configuration dialog box. When you have configured both  
BRI ports connected to the local telephone company, you are now ready to start routing between  
LANs.  
54  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
IP Setup  
The IP Port Setup dialog box enables you to change the IP routing capabilities that were set up  
during software installation. This dialog box has three tabs: Ethernet, WAN, and Advanced.  
The Ethernet tab enables you to configure two parameters relating to the Ethernet port. For  
example, you can change the Ethernet port IP Address and IP mask.  
WAN Tab  
If you enable the IP routing master control on the Advanced tab but disable the control on this tab, all  
IP packets received or to be transmitted on this WAN port will be discarded. Even if bridging is  
enabled, the packets will not get across the link.  
The Unnumbered Link option can be selected (checked) for the WAN ports for point-to-point links.  
When selected, it disables the Port Address and Remote Address groups. Unnumbered links are  
useful only between two routers; in this case, local and remote. When running RIP over a PPP link,  
both ends of the link must be either unnumbered or numbered with the same IP subnet. An  
advantage of not assigning an IP address to each WAN port is that you conserve valuable network  
and subnet numbers.  
RF300E/RF310E  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Remote IP Address defines the IP address for the destination end of a point-to-point link and is  
necessary only if the selected WAN port has been enabled for point-to-point operation.  
Note: the remote IP address must fall within the same IP network as the local WAN IP address.  
The Advanced tab is used to enable IP routing and RIP authentication and defines how the Dynamic  
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and Domain Name System (DNS) servers are to be used. This  
tab is also used to set up the default route, any filters, and Static Routes.  
The Routing option is normally checked; however, if you do not wish to have IP packets routed, then  
uncheck this item. If IP routing is disabled and bridging is enabled, IP packets are bridged; i.e., IP  
packets are transferred.  
The RIP option enables RIP based routing. RIP (Routing Information Protocol) is a protocol used  
among routers to exchange routing table information. RIP is the most common protocol used in both  
IP and IPX networks. It is also used internally by client workstations in IPX networks to obtain routes  
(shortest, or otherwise) to any distant network. RIP based routing should normally be enabled. It can  
be disabled, however, if you are using WAN links in Dial on Demand mode. For DOD links, disabling  
RIP will reduce traffic on the link as it will also disable periodic RIP broadcasts. RIP routing on a given  
port will be automatically turned off when Dial on Demand is enabled on the PPP Port Setup tab for  
the WAN port.  
The DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) group enables you to set up the WAN ports as  
client-only. Then, a PPP client connected to the WAN port will be on the same IP network as the LAN  
port of the RASFinder. This feature can save some extra IP addresses that otherwise would have  
been taken up by the WAN port. Enabling the Client option allows the RASFinder to dynamically get  
an IP address for a PPP client coming up on one of its “Client-only” WAN ports. When this option is  
enabled, there must be a DHCP server or a DHCP relay agent on the connected LAN in order for the  
RASFinder to acquire an appropriate IP address.  
When the router is configured for remote access, the DNS Resolver needs to be enabled so that  
applications such as the terminal server will support Domain Names. The dotted decimal IP address  
of the Local DNS server should be entered in the field provided.  
The Static Routes feature allows a router to direct packets from the local network down a predefined  
path (static route) to a remote network. Static routing is normally used when a part of an internetwork  
can be reached by only one particular path. Static routes are manually configured routes that specify  
the transmission path a data packet must follow based on the data packet’s destination address. A  
static route can be setup on the corporate network so that a client pc on the manufacturing network  
56  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
could send a document to the corporate printer.  
This static route is shown in the top network in Figure 4-4. A static route can also use an  
unnumbered link to provide a particular route for a remote server to appear as a server on the  
corporate network. The unnumbered link is shown in the middle network in Figure 4-4.  
Corporate  
LAN  
Client PC  
Remote Network  
Workstation  
IP Address  
192.168.2.3  
Client PC  
RASFinder or Router  
IP Address 200.1.1.1  
IP Address  
Subnet mask  
Default Gateway  
-
200.1.1.10  
255.255.255.0  
200.1.1.1  
-
-
-
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0  
WAN Local 200.2.10.2  
WAN Remote 200.2.10.1  
-
-
-
Manufacturing  
Network  
RAS  
or  
Router  
RASFinder  
IP Address  
192.168.2.10  
Network Printer  
IP Address  
192.168.2.4  
0716556501  
0716546601  
0716556601  
0716456701  
0716556701  
200.2.10.1  
200.2.10.1  
Hub  
200.2.10.2  
BRI 1  
BRI 3  
Phone  
881-3100  
Hub  
BRI 2  
Publications  
Network  
200.2.12.1  
200.2.12.1  
Manuals Server  
IP Address 192.168.2.226  
RAS  
or  
Router  
0716546801  
-
PSTN  
Hub  
Subnet mask 255.255.255.224  
-
Default Gateway 192.168.2.225  
-
Radius  
Server  
IP Address  
192.168.2.6  
IP Address  
Subnet mask  
WAN Local  
-
192.168.2.225  
255.255.255.224  
Unnumbered  
-
-
Tech Support  
Network  
200.2.12.2  
Phone  
944-7064  
RAS  
or  
Router  
202.1.1.xxx  
Hub  
Internet Router  
IP Address  
192.168.2.220  
Figure 4-4. Static Routes  
In our first example above, where a data packet from the remote client PC on the manufacturing  
network is being sent to the corporate printer, a static route would be established on the corporate  
RASFinder to have WAN 1 and WAN 2 with network address of 200.2.10.1 and a gateway address of  
200.2.10.2, the remote network. The Static Routes Setup dialog box would contain the address of  
200.1.1.0 in the IP Address field and a gateway address of 200.2.10.2. The Unnumbered option  
would be left unchecked in this example. The IP Address field contains the address of the target host  
or network, a PC on the manufacturing network. The Gateway Address is the address of the local  
router on the manufacturing network (200.2.10.2) on the next hop toward the target host. The  
Address Mask is the IP subnetwork mask (255.255.255.0) of the target host. The Port field is  
inactive, greyed out in this example.  
This example establishes a static (direct) path for the user on the client pc on the manufacturing  
network to send a letter to the corporate LAN and have it printed on the corporate network printer.  
The control for this static path is the RASFinder on the corporate LAN.  
Now, for our second example of an unnumbered link where we want a server on a remote network to  
appear as a device on the corporate LAN. Lets use the example of the Internet router on the  
corporate network wanting to provide manuals from the Publications network to Internet users. Lets  
say that the Manuals Server on the Publications Network contains released manuals that a customer  
can down load from the corporate network. So in order to have the Manuals Server appear on the  
Internet router, we need to set up the corporate RASFinder with an unnumbered link and for the  
purposes of our example, lets use the middle two WAN ports (WAN 3 and WAN 4). Also, the  
Internet router will have a default route of 192.168.2.224 with a subnet Address Mask of  
255.255.255.224, and a Gateway Address of 192.168.2.10. The Manuals server would need a  
gateway pointing to the corporate RASFinder. The gateway address on the Manuals server could be  
192.168.2.225.  
RF300E/RF310E  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
So, for this application to work, you need to set up a static route on the Corporate RASFinder of  
192.168.2.220 which is pointing at the Internet router. You then need to go into the IP Port Setup  
dialog box, select WAN tab, highlight WAN 3, and activate the Unnumbered Link option. Then do the  
same thing for WAN 4. When you do this, the Port Address and the Remote Address groups become  
inactive. Now, you need to check the PPP/SLIP button on the Main menu and ensure that the  
Remote Port Setup group for WAN 3 and WAN 4 are set to Client or LAN.  
Now go back to the IP Port Setup dialog box and hit on the Advance tab, then click on the Static  
Routes button. This brings up a blank IP Static Routes dialog box, hit the Add button to bring up the  
Static Routes Setup dialog box and when you enable the Unnumbered option, the Gateway Address  
option becomes inactive.  
Now, for the IP Address field we want the address of the Internet router on the Corporate LAN which  
in our unnumbered example is 192.168.2.224. In order for the Manuals server on the Publications  
network to appear on the Corporate LAN, we need to subnet the Manuals server with an Address  
Mask of 255.255.255.224. The Port option identifies the WAN ports on the Corporate RASFinder that  
are unnumbered. In our example, WAN 3 and WAN 4 are the unnumbered ports. So you would  
develop the Static Routes Setup dialog with WAN 3 as the WAN port and establish a second Static  
Routes Setup dialog with the only change from the above dialog box is that WAN 4 is the port  
number.  
When we click on the OK button for the second Static Routes Setup dialog box, the IP Static Routes  
dialog box now displays two examples of static routes.  
To complete the Static Route application, the Publications network RASFinder or router, depending  
on the type of device used on the network would need a default route of 192.168.2.226 that is looking  
at the Manuals Server. The Ethernet port IP address could be 192.168.2.225 with a net mask of  
255.255.255.224.  
58  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
Filters  
The network administrator can set up filters on the RASFinder for better control. Filtering can be used  
when you want to block all packets originating from a specific destination (called source address  
filtering) or all packets heading for a particular destination (called destination address filtering). Filters  
can be set up to exclude packets of a particular protocol (TCP or UDP) or any particular field in a  
LAN packet. The IP Filtering Setup dialog box lists the port, address, or Internet Control Message  
Protocol (ICMP) filtering for the IP protocol.  
Initially, the filtering list window, i.e., the window area that displays the Type, Port, Protocol, and  
Protocol Port information is blank. This information is displayed in the window when the Add/Edit IP  
Port or Address Filter dialog box is filled out.  
Note: When filters are installed, the RASFinder needs to do extra processing (i.e., it needs to look  
into each packet that has to be routed or bridged). Thus, installing too many filters may lead to  
performance degradation.  
Port filtering filters or forwards IP packets based on their specific purpose; i.e., whether they are  
Telnet (TCP based) or TFTP (UDP based) packets. Address filtering filters or forwards packets  
based on their source or destination IP address. Separate filtering support is provided for specific  
kinds of received ICMP packets.  
The filtering list window on the Port Filtering tab (above) displays the filter Type, the physical Port  
(LAN, or one of the WAN ports), the Protocol (TCP or UDP), and the Protocol Port. On the Address  
Filtering tab (not shown), the Protocol and Protocol Port columns are replaced by IP Address.  
To add or edit a filter listing, the Add/Edit IP Port (Address) Filter dialog box is used. This dialog  
box enables you to create an entry which is then displayed in the filtering list window. In the example  
Add/Edit IP Port Filter dialog box, the protocol that is going to be filterred is TCP, the physical port on  
RF300E/RF310E  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
which the filtering is going to take place is the LAN port, the protocol port is telnet which translates  
into protocol port number 0023 in the filtering list window, and the filter type is Filter on Destination  
Port which means to drop all IP packets whose destination protocol port is telnet.  
Address filtering uses the IP address in the IP Address field (example, packets with address  
192.168.2.40), applies filtering to the physical port listed in the Physical Port field (LAN), and if the  
Filter Type is Filter on Destination Address that means that all packets with an IP address of  
192.168.2.40 that are destined for the LAN port are blocked.  
ICMP filtering provides separate filtering support for specific kinds of received ICMP packets. ICMP  
filtering is used in IP networks as an internal protocol for nodes to exchange control and diagnostic  
information. Applications normally do not use ICMP filtering for any purpose.  
You can select ICMP filtering on your LAN or WAN ports and the type of filtering on each port by  
choosing the filtering type from the ICMP Packet Types list.  
60  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
IPX Setup  
The IPX Virtual Port Setup dialog box is used to control the four frame types and set up the WAN  
ports of the RASFinder. The Advanced tab opens an IPX general setup window used to enable or  
disable IPX routing and autolearn of Ethernet network numbers.  
In IPX based networks using Ethernet, LAN segments can support the use of four different Ethernet  
frame formats over the same physical link (provided each frame type has a unique network address  
as a virtual port).  
The Wan tab allows you to enable or disable IPX routing on the WAN ports and change the network  
number for the WAN ports. The IPX WAN network number has to be the same on both ends of the  
link and must be unique throughout the internetwork. If a WAN port is configured in a point-to-point  
operation, both WAN network numbers have to be the same and unique.  
NetBIOS, when enabled, enables the transport of Novell encapsulated NetBIOS packets on the  
specified virtual IPX port. Refer to Novell documentation regarding NetBIOS operation over NetWare  
based LANs.  
The Advanced tab controls the master routing of the protocol and auto learn of Ethernet network  
numbers, defines the broadcast name of the RASFinder, and enables IPX filtering.  
RF300E/RF310E  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
If bridging of IPX packets is desired, IPX routing must be disabled and frame type support for the  
frame type must be enabled.  
If there is a server on the local segment, then IPX network number auto learn should be enabled. If  
there is no server, or if for some reason the RASFinder comes up before the server does, the  
RASFinder will default to some random network numbers after a short period of time.  
IPX Filters  
The network administrator can set up filters on the RASFinder for better control. IPX packet filtering  
can be set up to selectively filter or forward packets based on the IPX address.  
Filtering can be used when you want to block all packets originating from a specific destination  
(called source address filtering) or all packets heading for a particular destination (called destination  
address filtering). Filters can be set up to exclude packets of a specific port. The IPX Filtering Setup  
dialog box lists the filter type, port, and IPX address. Initially, the filtering list window, i.e., the window  
area that displays the Filter Type, Port, and IPX Address information is blank. This information is  
displayed in the window when the Add/Edit IPX filter dialog box is filled out.  
Note: When filters are installed, the RASFinder needs to do extra processing (i.e., it needs to look  
into each packet that has to be routed or bridged). Thus, installing too many filters may lead to  
performance degradation.  
The Add or Edit IPX Filter dialog box allows you to enter a network number and node number, and  
define a socket number, physical port, and filter type. The Network Number defines the physical port  
which is defined by turning off AutoLearn Ethernet Network Numbers option in the IPX Virtual Port  
Setup dialog box under the Advanced tab. The Node Number is a 12-digit alphanumeric MAC  
Address of the Ethernet NIC that is providing your Ethernet interface. The Node Number is defined in  
the IP Configuration dialog box under the Adapter Address in the Ethernet Adapter Information group.  
The Adapter Address is presented with dashes between each set of two alphanumeric digits. These  
dashes can not be used in the Node Number. The IP Configuration dialog box is accessed from a  
DOS prompt by enterring winipcfg.  
The socket number, physical port, and filter type are provided in drop down lists. Three socket  
number selection are provided; NCP, RIP, and SAP. The physical port lists the available port for  
which filtering can be accomplished; LAN and the WAN ports. The filter type defines whether you are  
going to forward or filter depending on the source or destination address.  
62  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
Spanning Tree Setup  
This dialog box lets you configure the parameters for transparent bridging or bridging using Spanning  
Tree Algorithm as specified in IEEE 802.1d standard. Transparent bridging occurs between two  
remote Ethernet LANs.  
Spanning Tree Algorithm is a protocol specified by the IEEE 802.1d standard for use by bridges to  
perform bridging. Bridges implementing this protocol interact with each other so as to prevent  
bridging-loops in an internetwork with redundant links to the same networks. This algorithm also  
allows for automatic use of alternative routes (provided there are redundant paths to the destination)  
in case the original route is unavailable for some reason.  
Bridging needs to be enabled to support networking protocols such as NetBIOS. However, if you are  
using only IP and IPX, the RASFinder will operate more efficiently if you leave bridging disabled.  
The Filters button enables the construction of a filtering database. Packets whose Ethernet source  
address or destination address is not found in the filtering database will either be filtered or  
forwarded, depending on the setting of the Default Action field, with a default setting of “forward.”  
Filtering can be used when you want to block all packets originating from a specific destination  
(called source address filtering) or all packets heading for a particular destination (called destination  
address filtering). Filters can be set up to exclude packets of a specific port. The Spanning Tree  
Filtering Setup dialog box lists the filters by filter type, port, and Ethernet address. Initially, the  
filtering list widow, i.e., the window area that displays the Filter Type, Port, and Ethernet Address  
information is blank. This information is displayed in the window when the Add/Edit Spanning Tree  
Filter dialog box is filled out.  
Note: When filters are installed, the RASFinder needs to do extra processing (i.e., it needs to look  
into each packet that has to be routed or bridged). Thus, installing too many filters may lead to  
performance degradation.  
The add or edit Spanning Tree Filter dialog box allows you to enter the Ethernet address (for  
example 00015345678) to which you want to apply filtering, the physical port (WAN 1) on which the  
filtering is going to be applied, and the filter type in our example of Filter Destingation Address.  
RF300E/RF310E  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
This means that all packets with a destination address of 00015345678 going to WAN 1 are dropped.  
64  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
WAN Port Setup  
The WAN Port Setup dialog box controls how each WAN port is configured. The options at the top  
of the dialog box (i.e., Port Enable, Needs Dial Backup, and the Scripting options) can be assigned to  
each port listed in the Wans group in the lower right part of the dialog box. The Connection Method  
can be set for either Answering or Dialing for each port listed in the Wans group. When the dialing  
option is selected, the Asynchronous Gateway Server [AG Server] and Terminal Server groups  
become inactive. To configure a WAN port for dial backup, you need to click on the Needs Dial  
Backup option and then click on the Backup Port tab and enter the call back phone number, WAN  
port, and priority of the call.  
If a WAN port Needs Dial Backup in case it loses carrier (i.e., the Carrier signal, DCD, goes down),  
then Wan 6 is dedicated for this purpose. Therefore, five of the six WAN port can be used for dial  
backup. When the Needs Dial Backup option is selected, the call back number needs to be enterred  
in the Dial Number field of the Backup Parameters. The WAN port number has to be specified and  
the priority of the call back has to be specified. The call back priority ranges from No Priority to four.  
The Script button provides access to the scripting options. The Script Dialog menu enables you to  
edit, compile and download scripts. A script file (a text file containing a sequence of commands; refer  
RF300E/RF310E  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
to Appendix B) can be used to automate certain RASFinder operations. The Script Enable or  
Restart Script On Communications Failure option can be used to either start scripting or restart a  
script upon failure.  
The RASFinder has built-in support for Multi-Tech Communication Services Interface Server (MCSI,  
NASI, NCSI, or AG server) if every asynchronous communication line across the internetwork has a  
unique MCSI name. If you set the Connection Method for Answering, the Asynchronous Gateway  
Server (AG Server) group becomes active, enabling you to set the General Name and Specific  
Name of the interface corresponding to that specific WAN Port. The name of the AG Server is  
assumed to be the same as the IPX router name (or at least the first eight characters of the Router  
Name entered on the Default Parameters dialog box during initial configuration). The General Name  
can be any 8 alphanumeric characters (with no question marks) and the Specific Name can be any  
14 alphanumeric characters (with no question marks).  
Setting the Connection Method for Answering also activates the Terminal Server group, where you  
need to enter, in the field provided, the dotted decimal IP Address of the default Telnet server.  
From the Advanced tab, you can define the parameters for each WAN port, i.e., whether it is an  
ISDN parameter or a modem parameter. In defining the ISDN TA Control parameters, you highlight  
the WAN number and click on the Edit button. To define the modem parameters for the five out of six  
modems, you enter the modem string in the appropriate String number corresponding to the WAN  
port selected the Wan tab.  
When you select the Wan port in the ISDN TA Control group and click on the Edit button, the ISDN  
Parameter Configuration dialog box is displayed with the Wan port number displayed in the Config  
name field. The Config name field is greyed out so that it can not be changed.  
66  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
This dialog box displays the network switch type and the US Parameters or the Europe Parameters,  
depending on the switch type selected. In the first example (above), the default US Parameters are  
displayed and are available for editing purposes. The Net Switch Type is also unavailable as it is the  
switch type that was defined for this particular configuration.  
General Parameters  
Data TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) - You may have received a fixed TEI (a number from 0 to 63)  
from your provider; if so, then select that number from the list in the Data TEI box. However, if the  
central office switch assigns a dynamic TEI each time your RASFinder connects to the network, then  
leave it set to the default, “Auto TEI.” If you have multiple RASFinders attached to a network  
terminator bus, you may want to set the Data TEI to ”Disabled.”  
Voice TEI - You may have received a fixed TEI (a number from 0 to 63) from your provider; if so, then  
select that number from the list in the Voice TEI box. However, if the central office switch assigns a  
TEI each time your RASFinder connects to the network, then leave it set to “Auto TEI.” Again, if you  
have multiple RASFinders attached to a network terminator bus, you may want to set the Voice TEI  
to “Disabled.”  
US Parameters  
The US Parameters group includes the Data SPID, Voice SPID, the data Directory Number (DN),  
and the voice DN. The SPIDs and Directory Numbers may not be required by your service provider;  
but, if they are required, the fields are defined below.  
Data SPID (Service Profile Identifier) - Enter the Data SPID, if required, that was assigned by the  
local phone company for the specific BRI line to which the RASFinder is attached. The Data SPID  
string can have up to 20 characters. For DMS-100 switches, any ASCII character except the  
underline (_) is valid; For NI-1 and AT&T switches, only the digits 0-9 are valid.  
Voice SPID - Enter the Voice SPID, if required, that was assigned by the local phone company for  
the specific BRI line to which the RASFinder is attached. The Voice SPID string can have up to 20  
characters. For DMS-100 switches, any ASCII character except the underline (_) is valid; For NI-1  
and AT&T switches, only the digits 0-9 are valid.  
Data Directory Number (DN) - The data DN is a telephone number the ISDN service provider  
assigns, if required, to the RASFinder at subscription time; this can be a string of up to 24 characters.  
Valid characters are 0-9, the * character, and the # character.  
RF300E/RF310E  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Voice DN - The voice DN is a telephone number the ISDN service provider assigns, if required, to the  
RASFinder at subscription time; this can be a string of up to 24 characters. Valid characters are 0-9,  
the * character, and the # character.  
European Parameters  
The Europe Parameters group includes the Data ISDN, Voice ISDN, the Data Sub Address, and the  
voice Sub Address. The Data and Voice ISDNs and Sub Addresses may not be required by your  
service provider. If the ISDNs and Sub Addresses are required, the fields are defined below.  
Data ISDN - Enter the Data ISDN, if required, that was assigned by the local phone company for the  
specific BRI line to which the RASFinder is attached. The Data ISDN string can have up to 20  
characters. If the switch type is NET3, the Data ISDN is not used.  
Voice ISDN- Enter the Voice ISDN, if required, that was assigned by the local phone company for the  
specific BRI line to which the RASFinder is attached. The Voice ISDN string can have up to 20  
characters. If the switch type is NET3, the Voice ISDN is not used.  
Data Sub Address - The Data Sub Address is a telephone number the ISDN service provider  
assigns, if required, to the RASFinder at subscription time; this can be a string of up to 24 characters.  
Valid characters are 0-9, the * character, and the # character.  
Voice Sub Address - The Voice Sub Address is a telephone number the ISDN service provider  
assigns, if required, to the RASFinder at subscription time; this can be a string of up to 24 characters.  
Valid characters are 0-9, the * character, and the # character.  
Call Control Parameters  
Persistent DTR Dialing - Data Terminal Ready (DTR) normally goes high when a communication  
program starts or is ready to dial. A high DTR on the serial port indicates that your computer or  
terminal is ready to communicate with the RASFinder. The Persistent DTR Dialing function built into  
the RASFinder enables the RASFinder to automatically redial the telephone number of the ISDN  
service provider whenever DTR is high and there is no active call on the serial port. You can either  
enable or disable this feature (the default for this function is “disabled” or unchecked).  
Note: You can use the key combination, “Alt-P” to check or uncheck this function.  
Calling Line Identification (CLI) - When you check this function, the RASFinder identifies (for ISDN  
data calls only) whether the two endpoints of a connection are enabled or disabled for the purposes  
of RING messages. If the Calling Party Number is included in the incoming SETUP message for a  
given call, the RING message will display it, together with the Called Party Number, in the following  
format: “FM: 5552000 TO: 5551000.” If the Called Party Number is not included in the SETUP  
message, the RING message will show only the Calling Party Number as follows: “FM: 5552000.” If  
neither number is included, the RING message will contain no additional information. The default for  
this parameter is “enabled” or checked.  
68  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
Note: you can use the key combination of “Alt-D” to check or uncheck this function.  
Auto Protocol Detection - You should leave this function disabled (unchecked) because we set the  
Data Protocol in the Data Control group to “MLPPP” and do not use any of the other protocols listed  
there.  
Auto Answer Data Calls - You can enable this function if you want your RASFinder to answer  
automatically all incoming data calls (this option does not affect the analog port). If you do enable the  
Auto Answer function, you should also set the Rings To Answer function unless you want to leave it at  
the default selection which is one ring before it answers. (Selecting either “0” or “1” causes it to  
answer after the first ring.)  
Data Control  
Data Protocol - As mentioned above (in Auto Protocol Detection), we leave this function set to  
MLPPP, which uses both B channels (each at rates of up to 64 Kbps per channel) providing an  
aggregate data transmission speed of 128 Kbps, maximum.  
Dialing Method - The default is “Enbloc,” which is used for most ISDN dialing; however, if your  
RASFinder is on a private network you can switch to the “Overlap” dialing method for establishing a  
data call on the ISDN line.  
Strings  
The Strings dialog box allows you to add additional initialization commands for your ISDN  
configuration. The AT commands for your ISDN String are found in Attachment D of this User Guide.  
RF300E/RF310E  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Point-to-Point Setup  
The PPP Port Setup dialog box controls the WAN port protocol, dial on demand, and remote port  
setup. The WAN port protocol can be either Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) or Serial Line Internet  
Protocol (SLIP). Of these two protocols, PPP is the more robust as it enables the endpoints to  
negotiate the use of the link and protocol parameters in a standardized way and also enables for  
standardized encapsulation of the packets. SLIP is an older protocol which requires manual  
authentication using a script.  
PPP is the default protocol. The PPP software in the RASFinder internally negotiates the use of a  
suitable authentication protocol (PAP or CHAP) with the remote router or remote access client  
software. When either PAP or CHAP (or both) is enabled, the RASFinder expects the peer (the client  
on the other side of the WAN link) to be configured with a User Name and Password combination that  
is in the RASFinder’s User Database. The User Name and Password are both ASCII character  
strings that can be up to 30 characters long. However, for router-to-router connections, authentication  
is normally not used and the User Name and Password fields are empty.  
If SLIP is to be used on one of the WAN ports, then select the SLIP Enable option on the  
corresponding tab and PPP will be disabled automatically. If the TCP/IP header is to be compressed  
using VJC compression, then check the CSLIP (Van Jacobson Compression) option. (Note: on  
answering WAN ports, the RASFinder can detect the type of connection -- PPP or SLIP.)  
You can set up the RASFinder to bring down the connection on the WAN link when there is no real  
data traffic on the line; the router will then automatically bring up the WAN link when data is available  
to go across the link.  
In the Remote Port Setup group, the Client only option saves IP addresses in a RAS application  
because the remote node (a dial-in client) becomes a virtual extension of the Ethernet LAN. For  
Routing, however, you must check the Client or LAN option, in which case there will be no saving of  
IP addresses on the WAN ports.  
70  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
Applications  
In addition to local configuration, the RASFinder supports various applications that enable remote  
viewing and changing of the configuration from anywhere on the connected internetwork. To manage  
these applications, click Others on the Router Setup menu.  
The Applications Setup dialog box appears.  
Verify that the desired applications are enabled (checked). The default condition is all applications are  
checked. To disable a given application, click to uncheck the check box and disable support.  
For more information on using these remote configuration applications, click the on-line Help button  
or refer to Chapter 7, Remote Configuration and Management.  
Diagnostics  
The RASFinder is equipped with a built-in diagnostics utility that can be accessed by a PC cabled  
directly to the command port (remote users cannot access the diagnostics). Click the Built-in Test  
button on the Router Setup menu and the Diagnostics dialog box is displayed.  
In the Test Port group, select the either the WAN or Ethernet button you want to test. If you choose  
the WAN button, you can then select a specific WAN port to test by highlighting the WAN number in  
the drop down window. Click the Test button to start the test.  
For additional details and parameters about specific fields in the Diagnostics dialog box, click the  
on-line Help button.  
RF300E/RF310E  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
72  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Access Device  
Chapter 5 - Client Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Introduction  
The information provided in this chapter enables multiple users to configure their PCs to access the  
LAN through a RASFinder. The procedures are divided into two sections, based on operating  
platform. The first section covers configuration of Windows 98/95 PCs, and the second section  
covers configuration of Windows NT (4.0 Workstation) PCs.  
Before you Begin  
Before you begin the client setup process, read through the following requirements:  
RASFinder  
The RASFinder was configured by the administrator who, while installing the software, determined  
that the RASFinder would either automatically assign Internet (IP) addresses, or require that they be  
assigned manually to each client PC. Also, the administrator assigned an IP address to the  
RASFinder’s Ethernet port, and assigned user names and passwords to the WAN links. All these  
factors play a role in client configuration. Make certain that you are aware of the decisions made prior  
to setting up client PCs.  
PC  
To access the RASFinder, your PC must have communications capability including hardware such as  
a Dial Up Network Adapter/modem and any necessary software.  
Make certain that your Dial Up Network Adapter IP addressing is dynamically assigned (default). If it  
is, then the only information you may be required to obtain is the IP address of your organization’s  
Domain Name Server (DNS) - if DNS has been enabled on the IP Setup dialog box, Advanced tab.  
Note: In cases where the IP address has been manually assigned, you will need to know the IP  
address of the RASFinder (Gateway address) in addition to the organization’s Domain Name.  
Checklist  
A checklist has been provided towards the end of each procedure (Step 16). This checklist is  
included in the setup so that you can record all the pertinent information required for the connection  
between your PC and the RASFinder. Keep this as a reference for future upgrades.  
74  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 - Client Setup  
Configuring in Windows 98/95  
Perform the following steps to set up your Windows 98/95 PC:  
Note: All of the hardware and screens used in this section are intended as examples only. Please  
select options appropriate to your system.  
1. Click Start | Settings | Control Panel and then double click the Network icon.  
The Network dialog box (Configuration tab) is displayed which shows all the components (i.e.,  
clients, adapters, protocols, and any services) installed on your PC.  
2. If TCP/IP is listed, proceed to step 3; otherwise, refer to Installing TCP/IP (Win98/95), at the end  
of this section.  
RF300E/RF310E  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
3. Check for binding between the adapter and TCP/IP. In the Network dialog box, click your  
Ethernet adapter to select it, then click Properties to display the Adapter Properties window.  
4. Click the Bindings tab, then if necessary click the box to the left of TCP/IP so this entry is  
enabled (checked). When you are finished, click OK to return to the Network dialog box.  
Note: There may be other protocols listed and enabled under your Ethernet adapter. This does  
not affect the TCP/IP protocol. Rather, it simply means your computer will accept messages  
using those protocols as well as TCP/IP.  
76  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 - Client Setup  
5. Select TCP/IP, then click Properties to open the TCP/IP Properties window.  
6. Select the IP Address tab.  
The IP addressing method depends on how your RASFinder’s DHCP Server option was  
configured. If DHCP Server is active, your IP address is issued automatically from an external  
DHCP server located on the LAN. If your network administrator did NOT activate DHCP Services  
on the RASFinder, the IP address assigned to the client will be the same as the WAN’s remote IP  
address or may be assigned by a Radius server.  
Verify the RASFinder/DHCP status with your network administrator, then proceed to step 7 for  
DHCP assigned addressing, or to step 8 for manual addressing.  
Note: The RASFinder Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) option is enabled on the IP  
Port Setup, Advanced tab.  
7. If DHCP Services are active on the RASFinder (default), verify that the Obtain an IP address  
automatically option is selected. You are done; go to step 17 to reboot your PC and attempt to  
open an Internet session.  
8. If DHCP Services are NOT active on the RASFinder, you may be required to manually enter your  
IP address. In most cases, dynamically assigned addressing is the best alternative. The only  
exception would be if only one specific WAN port is accessed or if Radius is assigning an IP  
address based on the user logging into the Radius server. Select manual addressing by clicking  
the Specify an IP address option. The IP Address and Subnet Mask fields become active.  
RF300E/RF310E  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Remove the default IP address (if any) and begin typing the new address. This address is  
entered in dotted decimal notation and is comprised of four groups (octets) separated by periods  
or “dots.” If a group has fewer than 3 digits, type the necessary digits and press the space bar to  
move to the next group. When you are finished, verify that the IP address is identical to the IP  
address you were given for your PC.  
78  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 - Client Setup  
10. Click the Gateway tab.  
11. In the New gateway field, enter the IP address of the RASFinder’s Ethernet port and click Add.  
The new gateway address is displayed in the list of Installed gateways.  
RF300E/RF310E  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
12. Click the DNS Configuration tab. Verify that Enable DNS is selected (checked).  
13. In the Host field, enter your user name (e.g., jerry).  
14. In the Domain field, enter your company’s domain name (usually the company name followed by  
one of the following extensions: .com, .edu, .gov, .org, .mil, or .net. For example, multitech.com).  
15. In the DNS Server Search Order group, place the cursor in the first group of the address field  
and type the IP address of your LAN’s DNS server (provided by your network administrator).  
Click Add and the new address is displayed in the list below the address field.  
Your network may have more than one DNS server, allowing you to use a secondary DNS server  
if the primary DNS server is not available. If this is the case, add the IP address of the secondary  
DNS server using the same procedure as with the first.  
Note: The address that is displayed first (at the top) of the list is the primary server (the first one  
searched). You can “drag and drop” the items in the list, if necessary, until the primary DNS  
server is listed first.  
When this is done, click OK. You are returned to the Network dialog.  
16. In the Network dialog box, Click OK. You are returned to the Control Panel.  
Use the following checklist to record all the configuration settings for future use:  
80  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 - Client Setup  
Configuration Checklist  
IP Address (PC)  
IP Address (RASFinder)  
Host (User Name)  
Domain  
.
.
.
.
.
.
DNS Server Address  
Network Adapter  
.
.
.
(Manufacturer/Model Number)  
17. Reboot the PC for changes to take effect.  
At this point your client setup is complete. Test your setup by following steps 18 and 19. If you  
encounter problems, contact your administrator.  
18. Initiate an Internet session by double-clicking on your browser icon, or try to FTP a file.  
Note: The RASFinder operates transparently, so there should not be a need for any special  
settings on your IP applications (i.e., browser, Telnet, or FTP).  
19. To further validate your connection to the RASFinder, “Ping” the IP address of the RASFinder.  
RF300E/RF310E  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Installing TCP/IP (Win98/95)  
If TCP/IP is not already installed, perform the following steps:  
Note: For this procedure you may need your Windows installation disks or CD ROM.  
1. In the Network dialog box, click Add. The Select Network Component Type dialog box is  
displayed with a list of installation options.  
2. Select Protocol and click Add. The Select Network Protocol dialog box is displayed with  
protocol options.  
3. In the Manufacturers list click the manufacturer option (Microsoft in the example) to highlight it. A  
list of available protocols will appear in the Network Protocols list.  
4. In the Network Protocols list, select TCP/IP and click OK.  
5. Exit the add option. Click the OK button.  
Note: If Windows does not find the necessary files on the hard drive, click Have Disk and follow  
the on-screen instructions for loading TCP/IP from the installation disks/CD-ROM.  
6. Reboot your PC for changes to take effect.  
7. Click Start | Settings | Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to return to the  
Network dialog box. Return to step 3 of the Configuring in Windows 98/95 and continue with  
the client setup procedure.  
82  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 - Client Setup  
Configuring in Windows NT  
Perform the following steps to set up your Windows NT workstation PC:  
Note: All of the hardware and screen samples in this section are intended as examples only. Please  
select options appropriate to your network.  
1. Click Start | Settings | Control Panel.  
Double click the Network icon.  
2. The Network dialog box is displayed. Click the Protocols tab.  
A list of protocols currently present on your PC is displayed. Check the installed protocols. If you  
find TCP/IP Protocol listed, proceed to step 4. If TCP/IP is not listed, you must install it prior to  
proceeding. Refer to Installing TCP/IP (WinNT) at the end of this section.  
Click the Bindings tab.  
RF300E/RF310E  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
3. The Bindings tab is displayed.  
4. In the Show Bindings for drop down list, select all adapters. A list of all adapters is displayed.  
5. Double click the entry for your Ethernet card adapter to expand the list of bindings. Verify that  
TCP/IP Protocol is included in the bindings below your adapter.  
Note: There may be other protocols in the list under your Ethernet adapter. This does not affect  
the TCP/IP protocol. Rather, it simply means your computer will accept messages using those  
protocols as well as TCP/IP.  
6. Click the Protocols tab.  
84  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 - Client Setup  
7. In the Network Protocols list select TCP/IP, then click Properties. The Microsoft TCP/IP  
Properties dialog box is displayed.  
8. Click the IP Address tab.  
The IP addressing method depends on how your RASFinder’s DHCP Server option was  
configured. If DHCP Server is active, your IP address is issued automatically. If your network  
administrator did NOT activate DHCP Services on the RASFinder, you will have to assign your IP  
address manually.  
Verify the RASFinder/DHCP status with your network administrator, then proceed to step 9 for  
DHCP assigned addressing, or to step 10 for manual addressing.  
9. If DHCP Services are active on the RASFinder (the default), verify that the Obtain an IP address  
from a DHCP server option is enabled (checked). At this point, you are done. Go to step 20 and  
attempt to open an Internet session.  
10. If DHCP Services are NOT active on the RASFinder, you may have to manually enter your IP  
address. Select manual addressing by clicking the Specify An IP Address option. The IP  
Address and Subnet Mask fields become active.  
RF300E/RF310E  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
11. In the IP Address field, type the IP address assigned to your PC.  
Remove the default IP address (if any), and begin typing the new address. This address is  
entered in dotted decimal notation and is comprised of four groups (octets) separated by periods  
or “dots.” If a group has fewer than 3 digits, type the necessary digits and press the space bar to  
move to the next group. When you are finished, verify that the IP address is identical to the IP  
address you were given for your PC.  
12. In the Subnet Mask field, type the subnetwork mask assigned by your administrator. When you  
are finished, verify the new mask.  
13. In the Default Gateway field, type the IP address of the gateway assigned to your LAN. When  
you are finished, verify the new gateway.  
86  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software  
14. Click the DNS tab. The Domain Name System (DNS) properties are displayed.  
15. In the Host Name field, type your user name (e.g., jerry).  
16. In the Domain field, enter your company’s domain name (usually the company name followed by  
one of the following extensions: .com, .edu, .gov, .org, .mil, or .net. For example, multitech.com).  
17. In the DNS Server Search Order group, click Add. The TCP/IP DNS Server dialog box is  
displayed.  
18. In the DNS Server field, place the cursor in the first group and type the IP address of your LAN’s  
DNS server (provided by your network administrator).  
19. Click Add. You are returned to the Microsoft TCP/IP Properties dialog box, DNS tab, and the  
new address is displayed in the DNS Search Order list.  
Your network may have more than one DNS server, allowing you to use a secondary DNS server  
if the primary DNS server is not available. If this is the case, add the IP address of the secondary  
DNS server using the same procedure as with the first.  
Note: The address that appears first (at the top of the list) is the primary server (the first one  
searched). You can use the Up and Down buttons to rearrange the items in the list, if necessary,  
RF300E/RF310E  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
until the primary DNS server is listed first.  
When this is done, click OK. You are returned to the Network dialog box.  
Use the following checklist to record all the configuration settings for future use:  
Configuration Checklist  
IP Address (PC)  
IP Address (RASFinder)  
Host (User Name)  
Domain  
.
.
.
.
.
.
DNS Server Address  
.
.
.
Network Adapter  
(Manufacturer/Model Number)  
20. Reboot the PC for changes to take effect.  
At this point your client setup is complete. Test your setup by following steps 21 and 22. If you  
encounter problems, contact you administrator.  
21. Initiate an Internet session by double-clicking your browser icon, or try to FTP a file.  
Note: The RASFinder operates transparently, so there should not be a need for any special  
settings on your IP applications (i.e., browser, Telnet, or FTP).  
22. To further validate your connection to the RASFinder, “Ping” the IP address of the RASFinder.  
88  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6 - RAS Dial-out Redirector  
Installing TCP/IP (WinNT)  
If TCP/IP is not already installed, perform the following steps:  
Note: For this procedure you may need your Windows NT installation CD ROM.  
1. While the Network dialog box is open, click Add.  
2. The Select Network Protocol dialog box is displayed with a list of available protocol options.  
Highlight TCP/IP Protocol and click OK.  
If necessary (i.e., the operating system does not find the necessary files on the hard drive), click  
the Have Disk button, then follow the instructions provided on-screen.  
3. You are returned to the Network dialog box.  
4. Reboot your PC for changes to take effect.  
5. Open the Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to return to the Network Configuration  
window, then go to step 4 of the Configuring Windows NT procedure.  
RF300E/RF310E  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
90  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Access Device  
Chapter 6 - RAS Dial-Out Redirector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Introduction  
Multi-Tech’s Remote Access Server for Microsoft network users enables users to dial-out and fax-out  
through your RASFINDER. Remote Access Solution software uses Multi-Tech’s Communications  
Services Interface (MCSI - pronounced “Mik-see”). MCSI is a software redirector which complies  
with MCSI/NCSI/NASI defacto standards for software redirection.  
The Windows© version of MCSI, called WINMCSI, is supported on Windows 98/95 and Windows NT  
platforms. Since WINMCSI provides data communications connectivity, it needs to be installed and  
operating before your data communications application software is started.  
Installing and Configuring the WINMCSI Modem-Sharing  
Software  
The WINMCSI modem-sharing software (included on the CD) manages access to an Asynchronous  
Gateway (AG) for outbound calls. It allows Windows communications software packages that do not  
support INT6B or INT14 to connect to a gateway. It also detects other compatible communications  
servers (e.g., RASs) on your network and displays the resources they provide to eligible LAN users.  
To install WINMCSI in Windows 98/95 or Windows NT, follow the steps below:  
Note: Faxing through WINMCSI is only supported on modems using Lucent chipsets. If you are not  
certain as to the type of chipset in the internal modem, contact Multi-Tech Systems Technical  
Support.  
1. Power on your client PC and log in to your LAN.  
2. Start Windows.  
3. Insert the Multi-Tech RASFinder CD into your CD-ROM drive. The RASFinder AutoRun screen  
is displayed.  
- Close the RASFinder AutoRun screen.  
- Double-click your My Computer icon.  
- Right-click the CD-ROM drive icon.  
- Click Open. The wsredir folder contains two folders; one for Windows 9X operating systems  
(Mcsi95) and a second folder for Windows NT operating systems (Mcsint).  
4. For Windows 9X users, choose Mcsi95, double-click on Disk 1, and then click on the Setup.exe  
icon.  
For Windows NT users, choose Mcsint, double-click on Disk 1, and then click on the Setup.exe  
icson  
92  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6 - RAS Dial-out Redirector  
The WinMCSI Setup dialog box is displayed with the Welcome message.  
5. Click Next to continue.  
6. The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed.  
You can either choose the default Destination Location for your WinMCSI software by clicking  
Next>. If you click Browse, you can select a different destination folder for WinMCSI.  
RF300E/RF310E  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
7. The Choose the Network Type dialog box is displayed.  
For Win9X Operating Systems, you can choose from three network tpyes. For Windows NT  
Operating System your choose either IP or IPX protocol.  
Choose your operating system protocol and click Next to continue.  
8. The Modify Win.INI now dialog box is displayed for Win9X operating systems only.  
Click Yes to have WINMCSI automatically make changes to your Win.Ini files to have the  
operating system automatically load the utility upon startup.  
9. Files are loaded on your system  
94  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6 - RAS Dial-out Redirector  
8. The files are loaded onto your system and then the COM Port to MCSI Mapping widow is  
displayed.  
Note: If the IP option is selected, you will need to make a change to the ROUCON.INI file.  
Before making the change, make certain that the RASFinder software has been installed and  
is running. From a DOS prompt, change the directory location of the RASFinder 3.10  
software and then edit the ROUCON.INI by changing the line” AG Network Interface To Use  
= 0” to “AG Network Interface To Use = 1”. Once you’ve done this, save and download the  
changes.  
Click Add Port to add a port to the Local Port list box.  
If you want a specific line, click a COM port in the Local Port list box, then click the line to which  
you want to map that particular COM Port. The status message "Mapped to MCSI" should  
appear above the Local Port list box.  
Click Remove Port to permanently remove a port from the Local Port list box.  
Click the Unmap button if you want to unmap a line.  
Click the Search button to search for lines on a server.  
Click the Close button when finished.  
At this time Your WINMCSI software installation is complete. Proceed to the next section,  
“Running the WINMCSI Workstation Software.”  
RF300E/RF310E  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Running the WINMCSI Workstation Software  
WINMCSI has a workstation portion of the software that LAN users run and use to log onto the  
communications server prior to running datacomm software on their client PCs. The following steps  
guide you through this process.  
1. Start WINMCSI, click Start | Programs | MultiTech MCSI | ComMap.  
2. The ComMap for Windows window is displayed.  
The buttons from left to right are: Login, Logout, Map, Unmap, and Exit.:  
3. To setup ComMap, click Setup.  
Click the Network Type command. The Network Type dialog box is displayed. Your current  
network type is highlighted. You can change the network type by clicking the option button  
appropriate for your network. Click OK when finished. You must restart Windows if you change  
this setting.  
Note: Do not change the network type unless you have changed the network. Also, make sure  
that your SYSTEM.INI file contains the device drivers specific to the selected network type.  
Click the Connect Timer command. The MCSI Connect Timer dialog box is displayed. The  
default value of the connect timer is shown in the Enter Connect Timer Value field. To change the  
value of the connect timer, type in a different value. Click OK when finished.  
Click the Baud Change command. The ComMap Baud Change message is displayed. If baud  
change by an application is permitted, then this command is checked in the Setup Menu. If baud  
change is unchecked in the Setup Menu, then an application cannot change the baud rate (or  
other port parameters). Answer the message appropriately.  
Click the Default Login command. The Default Login Parameters dialog box is displayed.  
Use this dialog box to select a specific RAS to which you want to log into next time Windows is  
loaded. Click a RAS from the Available Servers box. If there are no servers in the Available  
Servers box, then click the Search button. Type in a User Name and Password (optional) in  
their respective fields. Click OK when finished.  
ComMap saves these login parameters in your COMMCSI.INI file.  
Note: You cannot directly edit the COMMCSI.INI file using a text editor because the password  
field is encrypted.  
4. If you have not logged into the network, do so now by clicking File | Login, or click the Login  
button. The MCSI Login window is displayed.  
96  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6 - RAS Dial-out Redirector  
The Available Servers box lists the names of the available servers. Click the name of the server  
to which you want to attach, type a User Name and Password in their respective fields, and then  
click Login. A window is displayed stating that your login was successful. Click OK. If there are  
no servers listed in the Available Servers box, then click the Search button to search for a  
server.  
5. At the ComMap for Windows main window, view your log status by clicking File | Log Status.  
The MCSI Login Status window is displayed.  
This window shows the name of the server to which you are logged in and the name with which  
you logged in. Click Close when you are finished.  
6. At the ComMap for Windows main window (to map a COM port through MCSI) click Map | Map.  
The COM Port to MCSI Mapping window is displayed.  
RF300E/RF310E  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Note: Windows 98/95 users will have two additional buttons in this box, the Add Port and the  
Remove Port buttons. You must click the Add Port button to view Local Ports. Click the  
Remove Port button to remove Local Ports.  
If you want to get the first available line, click the Map button and then click the Close button and  
go to step 7.  
If you want a specific line, click a COM Port in the Local Port list box, then click the line to which  
you want to map that particular COM Port. The status message "Mapped to MCSI" should  
appear above the Local Port list box.  
Click Unmap if you want to unmap a line.  
Click Search to search for lines on a server.  
Click Close when finished.  
7. To view a list of mapped COM ports, click Map | Map List, or click the Map button. Click Close  
when finished.  
8. To unmap a COM port, click Unmap | Unmap, or click the Unmap button. Click the listing you  
want to unmap and then click Unmap.  
9. To logout from the network, click File | Logout, or click the Logout button.  
10. To exit from WINMCSI, click File | Exit, or click the Exit button. Otherwise you may minimize the  
screen to minimize WINMCSI to an icon.  
98  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Access Device  
Chapter 7 - Remote Configuration and Management  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Introduction  
This chapter provides procedures for viewing or changing the configuration of a remote unit. Two  
methods are provided to access a remote unit; the first method is modem-based and the second  
method uses IP. Within the IP method, three different applications can be used: 1) LAN-Based  
configuration using TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol), 2) Telnet as a client application, or 3) a  
standard Web browser on the Internet.  
Remote Configuration  
Remote configuration requires that the RASFinder software be installed on the local PC. The local  
PC then controls the remote RASFinder either through the modem connection or over the LAN.  
Modem-Based  
To remotely configure a RASFinder, a local PC needs to be connected to a dial-up line and the  
RASFinder software configured to call the remote RASFinder. The remote RASFinder needs to have  
a modem connected to a dial-up line and the Command port. Once the connection to the remote unit  
is made, you can change the configuration as required. Once the configuration is changed, you can  
download the new configuration to the remote RASFinder. Perform the following steps to remotely  
configure a RASFinder through a modem connection.  
1. At the remote site, remove the serial cable from the PC to the Command port connector on the  
back panel of the RASFinder.  
2. At the remote site, connect a special cable (Remote Configuration Cable) from the Command  
port connector on the back panel of the RASFinder to the RS-232 connector on the modem. The  
special cable is a serial cable with male connectors on both ends. Refer to Appendix A for cable  
details.  
a. Connect the modem to your local telephone line.  
b. Provide your telephone number to the person verifying your configuration.  
c. Configure the remote modem for 19200 baud and turn on Force DTR.  
3. At the main site, connect your local PC to a modem that is connected to a dial-up line.  
4. Install the RASFinder software on the local PC. When installed, click Start | Programs |  
RASFinder | Configuration Port Setup, or double-click the Configuration Port icon in the  
RASFinder program group.  
5. The Port Setup dialog box is displayed.  
100  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 - Remote Configuration and Management  
Verify that the Communication Type field is set for COM Port and the Select Port option from  
the drop-down list matches the COM port of your local PC.  
In the Dial String field, enter the AT command for dialing (ATDT) plus the phone number of the  
remote RASFinder.  
If your Modem Initialization String, Initialization Response, or Connect Response values are  
different from the defaults in the dialog box, refer to your modem user documentation and change  
the values to match those required by your modem.  
When you are satisfied with your selections, click OK.  
6. Run the RASFinder Configuration program. Click Start | Programs | RASFinder | RASFinder  
Configuration, or double-click the RASFinder Configuration icon in the RASFinder program  
group.  
7. The Dialing Router dialog box is displayed while software is dialing the remote RASFinder.  
8. Once the Dialing Router dialog box completes, the Reading Setup dialog box is displayed.  
9. Once the Reading Setup dialog box completes, the RASFinder - Router Setup dialog box is  
displayed. This is the remote RASFinder dialog box. Refer to the on-line Help for a description  
of each dialog box and field within a dialog box.  
10. After you have changed the configuration of the remote RASFinder, click the Download Setup  
button to update the configuration. The remote RASFinder will be brought down, the new  
configuration written to the unit, and the unit will reboot.  
11. After the downloading is complete, click Exit.  
12. The Hangup connection with Router? dialog box is displayed  
Click Yes to disconnect the phone connection to the remote site.  
13. If the same telephone number is not going to be used again in the immediate future, you may  
want to remove it from the Port Setup dialog box.  
14. At the remote site, reconnect the RASFinder to the serial port of the PC and from the Program  
Manager screen click the Router Configuration Icon to verify that the RASFinder is running.  
RF300E/RF310E  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
LAN-Based  
The LAN-based remote configuration requires a Windows Sockets compliant TCP/IP stack. TCP/IP  
protocol software must be installed and functional before the configuration program can be used.  
1. You must assign an Internet (IP) address for the PC and for each node that will be managed by  
the configuration program. Refer to the protocol software documentation for instructions on how  
to set the IP addresses.  
Once you have completed this step, you should be able to use the protocol Ping command for  
the PC host name. You should also test the network interface configuration by Pinging another  
TCP/IP device that is connected to the network.  
2. Install the RASFinder software on the local PC. When installed, click Start | Programs |  
RASFinder | Configuration Port Setup, or double-click the Configuration Port icon in the  
RASFinder program group.  
3. The Port Setup dialog box is displayed.  
Verify that the Communication Type field is set to IP.  
In the Router IP Address field, enter the IP Address of the remote RASFinder.  
4. Click OK when you are satisfied with your selections.  
5. Run the RASFinder Configuration program. Click Start | Programs | RASFinder | RASFinder  
Configuration, or double-click the RASFinder Configuration icon in the RASFinder program  
group.  
The following screen is displayed.  
102  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 - Remote Configuration and Management  
6. Once the program has completed reading the configuration, the RASFinder - Router Setup  
dialog box is displayed. This is the main menu for the remote RASFinder. Refer to the on-line  
Help for the definition of each dialog box and field within a dialog box.  
7. After you have changed the configuration of the remote RASFinder, click Download Setup to  
update the configuration. The remote RASFinder will be brought down, the new configuration  
written to the unit, and the unit will reboot.  
8. After downloading is complete, click Exit.  
9. To verify that the RASFinder is running, double-click the RASFinder Configuration icon in the  
RASFinder program group.  
RF300E/RF310E  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Remote Management  
This section describes typical client applications that can be used to configure the RASFinder  
remotely. It is important to note that although any subsequent changes to configuration can be made  
using these methods, the initial setup and configuration of the RASFinder must be done from a local  
PC using the RASFinder software that is provided.  
Although establishing access to the RASFinder varies between these applications, the configuration  
functions correspond to those of the RASFinder software run on a local PC. For more information on  
RASFinder software, refer to Chapter 4 - RASFinder Software.  
Telnet  
A typical Telnet client application is described next. The RASFinder has a built-in Telnet Server that  
enables Telnet client PCs to access the RASFinder. A typical Telnet client is allowed to configure the  
RASFinder and its data ports. In addition, the RASFinder can be remotely accessed and configured  
from anywhere on the connected Internet through its Web interface.  
The TCP/IP stack has to be loaded before the Telnet client (a Windows application) will run. The  
Telnet Server option has to be selected from the Applications Setup dialog box using the Router  
Configuration icon and the Others button on the RASFinder - Router Setup dialog box. Double-click  
the Telnet icon (or shortcut) and a blank Telnet screen is displayed. Click Connect | Remote  
System and the Connect dialog box is displayed. Select (or enter) a Host Name (the IP address of  
the RASFinder). In this example, the IP Host Name is 192.168.2.23.  
When you enter a valid Host Name (IP address) and click Connect, you are immediately connected  
to the target RASFinder and the RASFinder Management Menu screen is displayed.  
RASFinder Management Menu  
The RASFinder Management Menu provides five functional options in addition to the option of  
escaping and closing the Telnet session.  
If you have entered a password in the Applications Setup dialog box in the RASFinder software,  
and have selected an option from the RASFinder Management Menu, you will need to enter your  
password before your choice is accepted.  
104  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 - Remote Configuration and Management  
To select an option, enter the number of the option and hit the Enter key. For example, to select the  
Dial-Out option, type 1 <Enter>. For details on a parameter, refer to the associated on-line Help.  
Dial-Out  
The Dial-out option (Option 1) on the RASFinder Management Menu enables a Telnet user to  
configure one of the WAN ports for a dial-out session. The default configuration of 115200 bps, 8N1  
can be used for the dial-out session, or the user can specify each parameter for the port (e.g., the  
baud rate, the number of data bits, parity, or the number of stop bits). When the connection is  
established, anything entered on the keyboard is immediately presented to the selected WAN port.  
When the dial-out session is over, the WAN port reverts to its original configuration.  
RASFinder Management  
The RASFinder Management option (Option 2) on the RASFinder Management Menu enables a  
Telnet user to view router statistics or system information; another option enables the remote user to  
Reset the router.  
RASFinder Configuration  
The RASFinder Configuration option (Option 3) on the RASFinder Management Menu enables a  
Telnet user to view and change parameters on the protocol stacks, view or change bridge  
information, select PPP or SLIP, select a WAN port, or enable/disable the supported servers  
(applications).  
WAN Device Configuration  
The WAN Device Configuration option (Option 4 on the RASFinder Management Menu) allows a  
remote user (a Telnet client) to put any port in WANTalk mode.  
Remote User Database  
The Remote User Database option (Option 5 on the RASFinder Management Menu) allows a remote  
user to add user information such as Name and Password, callback information, and which protocol  
stacks to enable or disable.  
RF300E/RF310E  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Remote User Database  
The Remote User Database option from the RASFinder Management Menu enables you to add and  
configure a list of users who will access the RASFinder remotely. After selecting Remote User  
Database (type 2 <Enter>) from the main menu, type A <Enter> to add a new user to the database.  
The following list of options is displayed:  
By selecting and configuring the various options and entering the desired information, you can  
construct a database of remote users for the RASFinder. For a detailed description of each option,  
refer to the on-line Help provided in your RASFinder software.  
Web Browser Management  
The RASFinder can be accessed, via a standard Web browser, from anywhere on the connected  
Internet. First, WEB Server must be checked (enabled) on the Applications Setup dialog box to  
enable this function. You can then access the RASFinder Configuration dialog box by typing the IP  
Address of the unit into the address line of your web browser. The following screen will be displayed:  
106  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 - Remote Configuration and Management  
Click the word Login to gain access to the RASFinder. The following screen are displayed:  
Type supervisor in the User Name field (no password is needed) and click OK. The RASFinder  
Configuration screen is displayed. From the RASFinder Configuration screen, you can access  
current settings and view statistics, as well as configure and download a new setup to the  
RASFinder.  
You can easily switch to the “Standard View” of the RASFinder Configuration menu if you prefer.  
Note: Only one user can access the RASFinder at any given time, and this user will have read/write  
rights over the unit.  
RF300E/RF310E  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
108  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Access Device  
Chapter 8 - Service, Warranty and Tech Support  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Introduction  
This chapter starts out with statements about your RASFinder two-year warranty. The next section,  
Tech Support, should be read carefully if you have questions or problems with your RASFinder. It  
includes the technical support phone numbers, space for recording your product information, and an  
explanation of how to send in your RASFinder should you require service. The final section explains  
how to obtain a catalog of available documents and then order technical literature using our 24-hour  
Fax-Back Service.  
Limited Warranty  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. (“MTS”) warrants that its products will be free from defects in material or  
workmanship for a period of two years from the date of purchase, or if proof of purchase is not  
provided, two years from date of shipment. MTS MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED  
OR IMPLIED, AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. This warranty does not apply to any  
products which have been damaged by lightning storms, water, or power surges or which have been  
neglected, altered, abused, used for a purpose other than the one for which they were manufactured,  
repaired by the customer or any party without MTS’s written authorization, or used in any manner  
inconsistent with MTS’s instructions.  
MTS’s entire obligation under this warranty shall be limited (at MTS’s option) to repair or replacement  
of any products which prove to be defective within the warranty period, or, at MTS’s option, issuance  
of a refund of the purchase price. Defective products must be returned by Customer to MTS’s factory  
transportation prepaid.  
MTS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AND UNDER NO  
CIRCUMSTANCES WILL ITS LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR DEFECTIVE  
PRODUCTS.  
On-line Warranty Registration  
If you would like to register your RASFinder electronically, you can do so at the following address:  
http://www.multitech.com/register/  
Tech Support  
Multi-Tech has an excellent staff of technical support personnel available to help you get the most out  
of your Multi-Tech product. If you have any questions about the operation of this unit, call 1-800-972-  
2439. Please fill out the RASFinder information (below), and have it available when you call. If your  
RASFinder requires service, the tech support specialist will guide you on how to send in your  
RASFinder (refer to the next section).  
Recording RASFinder Information  
Please fill in the following information on your Multi-Tech RASFinder. This will help tech support in  
answering your questions. (The same information is requested on the Warranty Registration Card.)  
Model No.: _________________________  
Serial No.: _________________________  
Software Version: ____________________  
The model and serial numbers are on the bottom of your RASFinder.  
Please note the type of external link device that is connected to your RASFinder before calling tech  
support. Also, note the status of your RASFinder including LED indicators, screen messages,  
110  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8 - Service Warranty and Tech Support  
diagnostic test results, problems with a specific application, etc. Use the space below to note the  
RASFinder status:  
________________________________________________________________________________________________________  
________________________________________________________________________________________________________  
________________________________________________________________________________________________________  
________________________________________________________________________________________________________  
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________  
______________________________________________________________________________________________________  
Contacting Tech Support via E-mail  
If you prefer to receive technical support via the Internet, you can contact Tech Support via e-mail at  
the following address:  
http://www.multitech.com/  
Service  
If your tech support specialist decides that service is required, your RASFinder may be sent (freight  
prepaid) to our factory. Return shipping charges will be paid by Multi-Tech Systems.  
Include the following with your RASFinder:  
•
•
•
•
a description of the problem.  
return billing and return shipping addresses.  
contact name and phone number.  
check or purchase order number for payment if the RASFinder is out of warranty. (Check  
with your technical support specialist for the standard repair charge for your RASFinder).  
•
if possible, note the name of the technical support specialist with whom you spoke.  
If you need to inquire about the status of the returned product, be prepared to provide the serial  
number of the product sent.  
Send your RASFinder to this address:  
MULTI-TECH SYSTEMS, INC.  
2205 WOODALE DRIVE  
MOUNDS VIEW, MINNESOTA 55112  
ATTN: SERVICE OR REPAIRS  
You should also check with the supplier of your RASFinder on the availability of loaner units and/or  
local service in your area.  
About the Internet  
Multi-Tech’s presence includes a Web site at:  
http://www.multitech.com  
and an ftp site at:  
ftp://ftp.multitech.com  
RF300E/RF310E  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Ordering Accessories  
SupplyNet, Inc. supplies replacement transformers, cables and connectors for select Multi-Tech  
products. You can place an order with SupplyNet via mail, phone, fax or the Internet at:  
Mail:  
SupplyNet, Inc.  
614 Corporate Way  
Valley Cottage, NY 10989  
Phone:  
Fax:  
800 826-0279  
914 267-2420  
Email:  
[email protected]  
Internet: http://www.thesupplynet.com  
SupplyNet On-line Ordering Instructions  
1. Browse to http://www.thesupplynet.com. In the Browse by Manufacturer drop-down list,  
select Multi-Tech and click  
2. To order, type in quantity, and click  
3. Click  
to change your order  
4. After you have selected all of your items click  
to finalize the order. The  
SupplyNet site uses Verisign’s Secure Socket Layer (SSL) technology to ensure your  
complete shopping security.  
112  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Access Device  
Appendixes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Appendix A - Cabling Diagrams  
Command Port Cable  
COMMAND  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
RJ-45  
PIN NO.  
DB9F  
PIN NO.  
1
2
4
7
8
3
2
6
1
5
3
To DTE  
To Command  
Port Connector  
4
TRANSMIT DATA  
RECEIVE DATA  
Device  
(e.g., PC)  
5
6
7
8
SIGNAL GROUND  
LAN Cables  
ETHERNET  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
10BASE-2  
10BASE-T  
Pin  
1
Circuit Signal Name  
Pin  
Description  
TD+ Data Transmit Positive  
TD- Data Transmit Negative  
RD+ Data Receive Positive  
RD- Data Receive Negative  
1
2
Center  
Shield  
2
3
6
WAN Cables  
BRI2  
BRI1  
BRI3  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
Pinout Chart  
Extra, unused pins are acceptable  
S/T-Interface  
U-Interface  
Signal Type  
RJ45  
DCE  
3
DTE  
DTE  
Transmit data  
(+)  
3
4
5
6
Receive data  
(+)  
4
5
6
4
5
Receive data  
(-)  
Transmit data  
(-)  
114  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B - Scripting  
Appendix B - Script Language  
The script file can be used to automate certain operations. The script file is a text file containing a  
sequence of commands. The structure of a script file is succinctly expressed by the following  
grammar.  
Script Language Grammar  
<program>  
=<declarations> <proc_declarations>  
<declarations>  
<var_type>  
={<var_type> <identifier> {, <identifier> } ; }  
=INTEGER I STRING  
<statement_list>  
<statement>  
={<statement>}  
=<elementary_statement> I <if_statement> I<for_statement> I  
<while_statement> I <switch_statement>  
<if_statement>  
<for_statement>  
=IF <expression> THEN <statement_list> {ELSE<statement_list> } ENDIF  
=FOR <identifier>=<expression> TO IDOWNTO <expression} STEP  
<expression> / DO <statement_list> ENDFOR  
=WHILE <expression> DO <statement_list> ENDWHILE  
=SWITCH <expression> {CASE <integer_const> <statement_list> I  
CASE <string_const> <statement_list> I  
<while_statement>  
<switch_statement>  
DEFAULT <statement_list> }  
ENDSWITCH  
<elementary_statement>  
=<identifier> = <expression> ; I <identifier> / (<expression>  
{,<expression> } ) /; I GOTO <identifier> ; I <identifier> : I ;  
=<expression> OPERATOR <expression> I {<expression> } I /<expression>I  
- <expression> I<identifier> / (<expression> {, <expression> } ) /  
= < I <= I > I >= I == I != I && I II I + I - I * I / I !  
=PROC <identifier>/(<parameter_list>)} { :<vartype> };FORWARD ;  
=PROC <identifier>/(<parameter_list>)} / : <vartype> / ;  
<declarations> <statement_list>ENDPROC  
<expression>  
OPERATOR  
<proc_declaration>  
<proc_declaration>  
<parameter_list>  
<argument_list>  
=<argument_list> { ; <argument_list>}  
={VAR} <var_type> <identifier> {<identifier>}  
Execution starts at the PROC main. PROC main cannot have any arguments. All the variables have  
to be declared before use. All procedures must be declared before calling. Recursion is allowed in  
procedures.  
To define mutually recursive procedures, use the FORWARD directive to indicate that the procedure  
body is defined later in the source file. Procedures defined with the FORWARD directive should have  
all the parameters and return value (if any) specified, the actual definition of the procedure body  
should not contain the formal parameter list or the return value. An example of forward defined  
procedures is given below:  
proc a(integer x,y) : integer,forward:  
proc b(integer u,v) : integer,forward:  
proc a;  
integer t;  
/*Some more code here. */  
t=b(x,y);  
/*Some more code here. */  
return(t);  
endproc  
proc b;  
return(a(u,v);  
endproc  
RF300E/RF310E  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Argument to procedures can be passed by value or address. To pass an argument by address, prefix  
the argument name in the formal parameter list by the keyword VAR; otherwise the argument is  
passed by value. Only variables can be passed by address. Expressions like A+B, where A and B are  
integer variables can be passed by value but cannot be passed by address.  
Two basic types of variables are supported:  
INTEGER and STRING  
In the STRING, since the ASCII null character is internally used to indicate the end of the sequence,  
it cannot be part of the string. All other characters, including extended ASCII characters can be part  
of the string.  
There are two types of conditional constructs:  
IF and SWITCH  
The IF statement is a two-way branching construct. The condition can be an arbitrary expression.  
The condition in the IF statement should evaluate to an integer or real. If the expression in the IF  
statement evaluates to non-zero, the control enters the THEN statement, otherwise control enters the  
ELSE statement.  
The SWITCH statement is a multi-way branching construct. The type of conditional expression  
should be either INTEGER or STRING. The value of the conditional expression is matched against  
the constraints given in the CASE options, if the value matches a CASE option value, control enters  
that CASE option. If the values do not match any of the CASE options, and if a DEFAULT option is  
provided, control continues at the DEFAULT option; otherwise control continues at the statement after  
the ENDSWITCH. If control enters one of the CASE or DEFAULT statements, all the statements up  
to the next ENDCASE statement are executed. Each CASE or DEFAULT statement should be  
terminated by a matching ENDCASE keyword. The SWITCH statement should be terminated by a  
ENDSWITCH keyword. The DEFAULT statement can be placed anywhere within the scope of the  
SWITCH statement. There can be only one DEFAULT statement.  
There are two types of iterative constructs:  
FOR and WHILE  
The FOR construct sets the loop control variable to an initial value. The control variable is checked  
for bounds, and if within bounds, the <statement_list> given is executed; otherwise the loop  
execution terminates. After each execution of <statement_list>, the control variable is incremented or  
decremented by a certain value. This is computed as follows: if the STEP expression is given it is the  
value of the expression, else it is 1. The control variable is incremented if TO is specified, and is  
decremented if DOWNTO is specified. After updating the control variable the bounds check is done  
again. The keyword ENDFOR is mandatory at the end of the loop.  
The WHILE loop has an expression and a <statement_list>. The expression is evaluated and if the  
expression is non-zero the <statement_list> is executed; otherwise the loop execution terminates.  
The keyword ENDWHILE is mandatory at the end of the loop.  
Operator Precedence:  
Operators are listed in the order of precedence  
Unary Operators :-!(unary minus, logical negation)  
Binary Operators :*/ + _< > <= >= == ! = && II  
All the operators are left associative. Expressions are evaluated completely; so care must be taken  
while writing expressions. For example, expressions like (a !=0 && b / a) would create run time error.  
116  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B - Scripting  
Example Script:  
proc main;  
string login_prompt;  
string user_name;  
string password_prompt;  
string password;  
string shell_menu;  
string shell_menu_response;  
integer timeout;  
timeout=10;  
login_prompt=”login:”;  
user_name=”user1”;  
password_prompt=”Password:”;  
password=”user1”;  
shell_menu=”choice:”;  
shell_menu_response=”1”;  
transmit(“A”);  
wait(1)  
transmit(“T^M”);  
waitfor (“OK”,10);  
transmit (“A”);  
wait (1);  
transmit (“T”);  
wait (1);  
transmit (“DT963^M”);  
if (waitfor (login_prompt,60)) then  
transmit (user_name);  
transmit (“^M”);  
if (waitfor (password_prompt,timeout)) then  
transmit (password);  
transmit (“^M”);  
if (waitfor (shell_menu,timeout)) then  
transmit (shell_menu_response);  
transmit (“^M”);  
else  
transmit (“Shell Menu Not Received^M”);  
endif  
else  
transmit (“Password Prompt Not Received^M”);  
endif  
else  
transmit (“Login Prompt Not Received^M”);  
endif  
Endproc  
RF300E/RF310E  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Appendix C - Regulatory Information  
Class B Statement  
FCC Part 15  
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates,  
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1)  
(2)  
This device may not cause harmful interference.  
This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Warning: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
Industry Canada  
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment  
Regulations.  
Cet appareil numerique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le materiel brouilleur  
du Canada.  
Fax Branding Statement  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer  
or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message  
clearly contains the following information:  
•
•
•
Date and time the message is sent  
Identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message  
Phone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual  
This information is to appear in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first  
page of the transmission. (Adding this information in the margin is referred to as fax branding.)  
Since any number of Fax software packages can be used with this product, the user must refer to the  
Fax software manual for setup details. Typically, the Fax branding information must be entered via  
the configuration menu of the software.  
118  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C - Regulatory Information  
FCC Part 68 Telecom  
1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules. On the  
outside surface of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration  
number. This information must be provided to the telephone company.  
2. As indicated below, the suitable jack (Universal Service Order Code connecting arrangement) for this  
equipment is shown. If applicable, the facility interface codes (FIC) and service order codes (SOC) are  
shown.  
3. An FCC-compliant telephone cord with modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is  
designed to be connected to the phone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is  
Part 68 compliant. See installation instructions for details.  
4. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected  
to the phone line. Excessive REN’s on the phone line may result in the device not ringing in response to an  
incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN’s should not exceed (5.0). To be certain of the  
number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total REN’s, contact the local  
phone company.  
5. If this equipment causes harm to the phone network, the phone company will notify you in advance that  
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn’t practical, the phone  
company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a  
complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.  
6. The phone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could  
affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the phone company will provide advance notice in  
order for you to make necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.  
7. If trouble is experienced with this equipment (the model of which is indicated below) please contact Multi-  
Tech Systems, Inc., at the address shown below for details of how to have repairs made. If the equipment is  
causing harm to the network, the phone company may request that you remove the equipment from the  
network until the problem is resolved.  
8. No repairs are to be made by you. Repairs are to be made only by Multi-Tech Systems or its licensees.  
Unauthorized repairs void registration and warranty.  
9. This equipment should not be used on party lines or coin lines.  
Manufacturer:  
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc.  
Trade name:  
RASFinder  
Model Numbers:  
RF300E  
FCC Registration Number:  
Ringer Equivalence:  
Modular Jack:  
AU7USA-24994-M5-E  
0.6B  
RJ-11C or RJ-11W  
Multi-Tech Systems Inc.  
2205 Woodale Drive  
Mounds View, MN 55112  
(612) 785-3500 Fax (612) 785-9874  
Service Center in U.S.A.:  
RF300E/RF310E  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Canadian Limitations Notice  
Ringer Equivalence Number  
Notice: The ringer equivalence number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an  
indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a phone interface. The  
termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement  
that the sum of the ringer equivalence numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5.  
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the  
equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety  
requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s  
satisfaction.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the  
facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an  
acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above  
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment  
should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any  
repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the  
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power  
utility, phone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This  
precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.  
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the  
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.  
EMC, Safety and Terminal Directive Compliance  
The CE mark is affixed to this product to confirm compliance with the following European Community Directives:  
Council Directive 89/336/EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws of Member States relating to  
electromagnetic compatibility.  
and  
Council Directive 73/23/EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonization of the laws of Member States relating to  
electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits:  
and  
Council Directive 98/13/EC of 12 March 1998 on the approximation of the laws of Member States concerning  
telecommunications terminal and Satellite earth station equipment.  
120  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
Appendix D - AT Commands  
One of the means by which you can communicate with and configure your RASFinder is to use AT  
commands. AT commands are so-called because, with only a few exceptions, each command string  
must begin with the characters AT. Using AT commands, you can read and set parameters, and  
perform actions such as dialing.  
Entering AT Commands  
If your RASFinder is connected to a computer terminal, you can send AT commands to the  
RASFinder by typing them on the terminal keyboard. If your RASFinder is connected to a computer,  
you can send AT commands to the RASFinder by typing them in the terminal window of a data  
communications program such as HyperTerminal. You can also send some AT commands indirectly  
by configuring your data communications program.  
Enter AT commands in the format AT <command string> <CR>. The characters AT cause the  
RASFinder to interpret the following string as a command. The command string consists of one or  
more commands. The carriage return character, <CR>, sends the command string to the RASFinder.  
If you are entering a command string in your communication program’s terminal window, insert the  
carriage return character by pressing the ENTER key on your keyboard. If you are configuring a  
communications program, on the other hand, you typically must insert the carriage return character  
by adding “^M” to the end of the command string.  
The RASFinder has three modes of operation: offline command mode (the default state), online  
command mode, and data mode. The RASFinder responds to AT commands only when it is in one of  
the command modes. After the RASFinder establishes a connection and goes online in data mode, it  
interprets any further characters you enter as data, rather than as commands, and transmits them to  
the remote device.  
When the RASFinder is in data mode, you can switch it to online command mode by sending it an  
escape sequence. The RASFinder responds to two types of escape sequences: in-band, in which the  
escape sequence is part of the data stream, and out-of-band, in which the escape sequence is  
outside the data stream. The in-band escape sequence is +++AT<CR>; the out-of-band escape  
sequence is <Break >AT<CR>. You can change the in-band escape character (+) by changing the  
value in register S2. You can send the break signal in the out-of-band escape sequence only from  
software, not by pressing SHIFT+BREAK on your keyboard.  
When it detects the escape sequence, the RASFinder enters online command mode, in which it  
responds to commands while maintaining the connection with the remote device.  
The RASFinder’s command buffer can store 80 characters, including spaces and other characters  
used in telephone numbers. If you mis-type a command string, you can edit it by using the backspace  
or the delete key, but only before you press ENTER. As you type a command string, it appears on  
your monitor screen, letting you verify your input as you type it.  
RF300E/RF310E  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Table of Contents  
Section  
D.1  
Description  
AT Commands  
D.1.1  
D.1.2  
D.1.3  
D.1.4  
D.1.5  
D.1.6  
D.1.7  
D.2  
Command Execution  
General Information Commands  
Network Configuration Commands  
Serial Port Configuration Commands  
General Configuration Commands  
Digital (Data) Call Commands  
Analog (Modem) Call Commands  
S-Registers  
D.3  
Result Codes  
D.4  
Troubleshooting the TA Port  
Specific Troubleshooting Situations  
Debugging/Logging/Troubleshooting Commands  
Debugging/Logging/Troubleshooting S-Registers  
Test Commands  
D.D.1  
D.D.2  
D.D.3  
D.5  
D.6  
Factory Profiles  
Table Section Description  
D-1  
D-2  
D-3  
D-4  
D-5  
D-6  
D.1  
D.2  
D.3  
AT Commands by Function  
S-Register Summary  
Result Codes  
D.D.2 Debugging/Logging/Troubleshooting Command Summary  
D.D.3 Debugging/Logging/Troubleshooting S-Register Summary  
D.5  
Test Command Summary  
D.1 AT Commands  
The TA’s command buffer can store 80 characters, including spaces and other characters used in  
telephone numbers. If you mistype a command string, you can edit it by using the backspace or the  
delete key, but only before you press <CR>. As you type a command string, it appears on your  
monitor screen, letting you verify your input as you type it. D-1 lists the AT commands recognized by  
the TA.  
Table-1. AT Commands by Function (D.1.1)  
AT  
Attention code  
Return  
+++AT<CR>  
<BREAK>AT<CR>  
Command execution  
In-band escape code  
Out-of-band escape code  
General Information Commands (D.1.2)  
In  
Ln  
!L  
Display Product Information  
List Active Profile Information  
Display Network Configuration  
>MIBn Management Information Block (MIB) Information  
Network Configuration Commands (D.1.3)  
%A97=n  
>A0=n  
!C0=n  
Dialing Method  
Type of Coding  
Network Switch Type  
Data SPID  
!C6=n  
*!C6=n  
Voice SPID  
122  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
!D0=n  
!D3=n  
*!D3=n  
!DNn  
*!DNn  
!ENn  
*!ENn  
!Nn=s  
*!Nn=s  
V.120 LLC Information Element  
SAPI-0 Data TEI  
SAPI-0 Voice TEI  
Disable Data DN/MSN n  
Disable Voice DN/MSN n  
Enable Data DN/MSN n  
Enable Voice DN/MSN n  
Data DN/MSN n  
Voice DN/MSN n  
Serial Port Configuration Commands (D.1.4)  
&Cn  
&Dn  
$Dn  
&En  
&Rn  
&RFn  
&Sn  
!SW  
*!SW  
#Xn  
DCD (Data Carrier Detect) Control  
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) Control  
Persistent DTR Dialing  
Flow Control  
CTS (Clear To Send) Control  
CTS/RTS Interaction Control  
DSR (Data Set Ready) Control  
Switch Serial Port Control to TA  
Switch Serial Port Control to Modem  
Send Multiple Xoff Characters  
General Configuration Commands (D.1.5)  
@CONFIG  
En  
%En  
&Fn  
%Mn  
Qn  
Configuration Menu  
Command Mode Echo  
Escape Sequence Options  
Load Factory Profile  
Management Mode  
Quiet Mode  
Sr=n  
Sr?  
Set S-register  
Read S-register  
Vn  
&Wn  
Xn  
Zn  
&Zn=  
!Z=n  
Terse/Verbose Result Codes  
Store Active Profile  
Connect Messages  
Reset to Stored Profile  
Store Telephone Number  
Rate Adapation/Data Protocol  
Digital (Data) Call Commands (D.1.6)  
A
Answer Digital Call  
Dial Digital Number  
Dial Stored Number  
Hang up Digital Call  
Digital Call Hold-off Time  
Return Online  
Dn  
DSn  
Hn  
!Hn  
On  
Analog (POTS) Call Commands (D.1.7)  
*An  
*Bn  
*Dn  
*Hn  
*!Hn  
Answer Analog Call  
Send Analog Dial Digit  
Dial Analog Number  
Hang up Analog Call  
Analog Call Hold-off Time  
RF300E/RF310E  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
D.1.1 Command Execution  
Command: AT  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Attention Code  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: This attention code precedes all command strings except the A/ command and  
escape codes.  
Command: RETURN or ENTER  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Command Execution  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: Press the RETURN (ENTER) key to execute a command. The RETURN key is  
frequently abbreviated <CR> in command examples.  
Command: +++AT<CR>  
Function:  
Unit:  
In-Band Escape Code  
ASCII  
Values:  
Default:  
Set by S-register S2  
+ (S2=43)  
Description: The +++AT<CR> command causes the TA to enter command mode, without  
disconnecting the call, when it is online with a remote device. The default escape  
code is three + characters, followed by the letters AT, up to 80 command characters,  
and a RETURN (press ENTER). The TA escapes to command mode, executes any  
commands in the string, and then remains in command mode. Use the S2=n  
command to change the escape character.  
Command: <BREAK>AT<CR>  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Out-of-Band Escape Code  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: This command places the TA in command mode while remaining online. Enter a  
break signal, the letters AT, up to 80 command characters, and a RETURN (press  
ENTER).  
D.1.2 General Information Commands  
Command: In  
Function:  
Unit:  
Display Product Information  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—Product ID (e.g. 247)  
n=1—Firmware version number (e.g. 1.02)  
n=2—Product model  
n=3—Product features  
n=4—Date and time firmware was generated  
n=8—Current settings used by Windows for descriptor identification  
n=9—Product name  
n=11—Digital Port Connection Information  
n=12—Analog Port Connection Information  
n=20—Extended Product name  
n=99—Crystal frequency  
124  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
Default:  
I0  
Description: The In command displays specific product information depending on the value of n.  
Command: Ln  
Function:  
Unit:  
List Active Profile Information  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—List stored numbers  
n=5—List AT command settings  
n=6—List S-register summary  
n=8—List Low-level ISDN Statistics  
n=9—List Connection Statistics  
L0  
Default:  
Description: The Ln command lists information for various settings or lists various statistics  
depending on the value of n.  
Command: !L  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Display Network Configuration  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: Use the !L command to display the TA’s current network configuration: MSN/DN,  
SPID, TEI, Data protocol, switch type, etc.  
Command: >MIBn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Management Information Block (MIB) Information  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
Default:  
n=0 through n=(number of digital plus analog ports)-1  
>MIB0  
Description: >MIBn displays the Management Information Block (MIB) information for the port  
specified by n. If n is not specified, n is assumed to be 0. n=0 is the first digital port.  
Digital port information is identical to the I11 information. Analog ports follow the  
digital ports and analog port information is identical to the I12 information. If there are  
two digital ports (n=0 and n=1), then the first analog port (if any) will be port n=2, the  
second analog port (if it exists) is port n=3, etc. >MIBn simply allows a specific port  
to display the I11 or I12 information of a port other than the one currently receiving  
the >MIBn command.  
D.1.3 Network Configuration Commands  
Use the following commands to select your network switch type (e.g., EuroISDN NET3, VN4, INS64,  
etc.), specify data directory/multiple subscriber numbers, specify TEI values if required, and to  
specify other information required to make an ISDN connection.  
Command: %A97=n  
Function:  
Unit:  
Dialing Method  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0 (En bloc sending during call SETUP)  
n=1 (Overlap sending during call SETUP)  
%A97=0 (En bloc)  
Default:  
Description: Standardized ISDN signaling protocols, such as DSS1, DSS2, and SS7, support a  
sending complete indication; i.e., a signal that no more digits will follow. However,  
appending such a signal to a telephone number is often impractical; therefore, many  
private networks send the number of a called party by using a procedure called  
overlap sending, in which no sending complete indication is sent. Computer users,  
however, can automatically append the sending complete indication to the telephone  
number by choosing the en bloc method of sending, which results in faster call setup.  
RF300E/RF310E  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Use the %A97=n command to select between the two methods.  
Command: >A0=n  
Function:  
Unit:  
Type of Coding (Speech/3.1KHz Audio)  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
Default:  
n=0 (A-law), n=1 (u-law)  
Switch-type dependent:  
AT&T 5ESS — n=1 (u-law)  
DMS-100  
— n=1 (u-law)  
EuroISDN NET3 — n=0 (A-law)  
INS64  
US NI-1  
VN4  
— n=1 (u-law)  
— n=1 (u-law)  
— n=0 (A-law)  
Description: With >A0=n it is possible to use a type of Speech/3.1KHz Audio coding that differs  
from the default type of coding for a specific switch type. This capability is useful for  
countries that require a specific switch type and a specific type of coding. For  
example, now it is possible to use u-law coding with NET3, which is how it is used in  
Tiwan, whereas NET3 by default uses A-law coding. AT!L<CR> or the @CONFIG  
configuration menu may be used to review the type of coding.  
Command: !C0=n  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Network Switch Type  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0 (AT&T 5ESS)  
n=1 (Northern Telecom DMS-100)  
n=2 (EuroISDN NET3)  
n=4 (INS64)  
n=5 (US NI-1)  
n=6 (VN4)  
Default:  
!C0=2 (NET3)  
Description: Use the !C0=n command to select one of the network switch types supported by the  
TA. The factory default setting is !C0=2 (NET3). Refer to the >A0=n command for a  
list of the default type of coding for the respective switch type. AT!C0?<CR> or  
AT!L<CR> may be used to review the switch type. The @CONFIG configuration  
menu can also be used to set and review the switch type.  
Command: !C6=n  
Function:  
Unit:  
Data SPID  
ASCII  
Values:  
Default:  
n=0- to 20-character string  
null string  
Description: Use the !C6=n command to specify the data service profile identifier (SPID) that the  
ISDN service provider assigned at subscription time. The data SPID string can have  
up to 20 characters. This command is not used if the switch type is set to NET3,  
VN4, INS6D. AT!C6?<CR> may be used to review the Data SPID or AT!L<CR> may  
be used to review all SPID numbers. The @CONFIG configuration menu can also be  
used to set and review the Data SPID.  
NOTE: For DMS-100 switches, any ASCII character except the underline (_) character is valid. For  
US NI-1 and AT&T switches, only the digits 0-9 are valid.  
Command: *!C6=n  
Function:  
Unit:  
Voice SPID  
ASCII  
Values:  
n=0- to 20-character string  
Default:  
Description:  
null string  
Use the *!C6=n command to specify the voice service profile identifier (SPID) that  
the ISDN service provider assigned at subscription time. The voice SPID string can  
have up to 20 characters. This command is not used if the switch type is set to  
126  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
NET3, VN4, INS6D. AT*!C6?<CR> may be used to review the Voice SPID or  
AT!L<CR> may be used to review all SPID numbers. The @CONFIG configuration  
menu can also be used to set and review the Voice SPID.  
NOTE: For DMS-100 switches, any ASCII character except the underline (_) character is valid. For  
US NI-1 and AT&T switches, only the digits 0-9 are valid.  
Command: !D0=n  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
V.120 LLC Information Element  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0 (disable),  
n=1 (enable)  
Default:  
!D0=0 (disabled)  
Description: Some switches do not support ISDN SETUP messages that contain a LLC (Low  
Layer Compatibility) Information Element (IE). When these switches receive a LLC IE  
in the SETUP they immediately reject the call and then the TA reports NO CARRIER.  
The LLC IE for V.120 may be disabled by using !D0=0 to avoid problems with  
switches that do not support a LLC IE. The V.120 LLC IE only helps the answering  
TA determine the type of digital call and various options associated with that call and  
so it is not necessary.  
Command: !D3=n  
Function:  
Unit:  
SAPI-0 Data TEI  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0-63 (Sets the TEI to a fixed value from 0 through 63)  
n=240 (Sets the data channel for dynamic TEI negotiation)  
n=241 (Disables TEI)  
Default:  
!D3=240 (Auto TEI)  
Description: Use the !D3=n command to set the terminal endpoint identifier (TEI) for the data  
channel. A TEI is a number used by the central office switch to uniquely identify each  
device that is connected to the network. When it uses dynamic TEI assignments  
(auto TEI), the central office switch assigns a TEI each time the TA connects to the  
network. However, the ISDN service provider may assign a fixed TEI at subscription  
time, in which case you must configure the TA with the fixed TEI number. You can  
also use the !D3=n command to disable the data channel, which may be useful when  
multiple TAs are attached to a network terminator bus. AT!D3?<CR> may be used to  
review the Data TEI or AT!L<CR> may be used to review all TEI numbers. The  
@CONFIG configuration menu can also be used to set and review the Data TEI.  
Command: *!D3=n  
Function:  
Unit:  
SAPI-0 Voice TEI  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0-63 (Sets the TEI to a fixed value from 0 through 63)  
n=240 (Sets the voice channel for dynamic TEI negotiation)  
n=241 (Disables TEI)  
Default:  
*!D3=240 (Auto TEI)  
Description: Use the *!D3=n command to set the TA’s terminal endpoint identifier (TEI) for the  
voice channel. A TEI is a number used by the central office switch to uniquely identify  
each device that is connected to the network. When it uses dynamic TEI  
assignments (auto TEI), the central office switch assigns a TEI each time the TA  
connects to the network. However, the ISDN service provider may assign a fixed TEI  
at subscription time, in which case you must configure the TA with the fixed TEI  
number. You can also use the *!D3=n command to disable the voice channel, which  
may be useful when multiple TAs are attached to a network terminator bus.  
AT*!D3?<CR> may be used to review the Voice TEI or AT!L<CR> may be used to  
review all TEI numbers. The @CONFIG configuration menu can also be used to set  
and review the Voice TEI.  
RF300E/RF310E  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Command: !DNn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Disable Data DN/MSN n  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=1 (disable Data DN/MSN 1),  
n=2 (disable Data DN/MSN 2)  
All ports are enabled  
Default:  
Description: !DNn disables a Data DN/MSN which will effectively disable the associated TA port  
from receiving any data calls. However, the port will still be able to originate data  
calls. This is useful for applications where a specific port is for dial-out only. Since the  
TA has only one serial port, both Data DN/MSN 1 and 2 would have to be disabled in  
order to not accept a call. If no port number is given then the assumed port number  
is that of the port from which the command was received. If port n had a DN/MSN  
set, then that DN/MSN is not erased. Enabling the port later by using the @CONFIG  
configuration menu or the !ENn command will re-enable that DN/MSN. AT!L<CR>  
may be used to review which ports are disabled (displays PORT DISABLED). The  
@CONFIG configuration menu can also be used to disable or review the disabled  
ports.  
Command: *!DNn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Disable Voice DN/MSN n  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=1 (disable Voice DN/MSN 1)  
n=2 (disable voice DN/MSN 2)  
All ports are enabled  
Default:  
Description: *!DNn disables a Voice DN/MSN which will effectively disable the associated voice  
port from receiving any voice calls. However, the port will still be able to originate  
voice calls. This is useful for applications where a specific port is for dial-out only or  
one doesn’t want to accept voice calls at that time. If no port number is given then  
the assumed port number is that of the port from which the command was received.  
If port n had a DN/MSN set, then that DN/MSN is not erased. Enabling the port later  
by using the @CONFIG configuration menu or the *!ENn command will re-enable  
that DN/MSN. AT!L<CR> may be used to review which ports are disabled (displays  
PORT DISABLED). The @CONFIG configuration menu can also be used to disable  
or review the disabled ports.  
Command: !ENn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Enable Data DN/MSN n  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=1 (enable Data DN/MSN 1),  
n=2 (enable Data DN/MSN 2)  
All ports are enabled  
Default:  
Description: !ENn enables a Data DN/MSN which will put it back in service for accepting and  
originating data calls. If no port number is given then the assumed port number is  
that of the port from which the command was received. AT!L<CR> may be used to  
review which ports are enabled (any port that does not display PORT DISABLED).  
The @CONFIG configuration menu can also be used to enable or review the  
disabled ports.  
Command: *!ENn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Enable Voice DN/MSN n  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=1 (enable voice DN/MSN 1)  
n=2 (enable modem DN/MSN 2)  
All ports are enabled  
Default:  
Description: *!ENn enables a Voice DN/MSN which will put it back in service for accepting and  
originating voice calls. If no port number is given then the assumed port number is  
that of the port from which the command was received. AT!L<CR> may be used to  
review which ports are enabled (any port that does not display PORT DISABLED).  
128  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
The @CONFIG configuration menu can also be used to enable or review the  
disabled ports.  
Command: !Nn=s  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Data DN/MSN n  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=1 (Data DN/MSN 1)  
n=2 (Data DN/MSN 2)  
s=25-character string  
null string  
Default:  
Description: The !Nn=s command sets the Directory Number (DN)/Multiple Subscriber Number  
(MSN) for data port n to the character string given by s. The DN/MSN is a telephone  
number (address) that is assigned to the TA at subscription time by the ISDN service  
provider. The DN/MSN is a string of up to 25 characters; valid characters are 0-9, the  
* character, and the # character. A “:” (colon) is used to separate the address from  
the subaddress if a subaddress is required. All data port DN/MSN numbers can be  
left empty, be the same, be different, or any combination of those choices. The TA  
uses the Data DN/MSN to discriminate which data calls may be answered. It also  
supplies the Calling Party Information Element with a calling party number and  
calling party subaddress if S56 is enabled. If no port number n is given, then the  
assumed port number is that of the port from which the command was received.  
AT!Nn?<CR> may be used to review the Data DN/MSN for port n or AT!L<CR> may  
be used to review all Data DN/MSN port settings. The @CONFIG configuration menu  
can also be used to set and review the Data DN/MSN port settings.  
Command: *!Nn=s  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Voice DN/MSN n  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=1 (Voice DN/MSN 1)  
n=2 (Voice DN/MSN 2)  
s=25-character string  
null string  
Default:  
Description: The *!Nn=s command sets the Directory Number (DN)/Multiple Subscriber Number  
(MSN) for voice port n to the character string given by s. The DN/MSN is a telephone  
number (address) that is assigned to the TA at subscription time by the ISDN service  
provider. The DN/MSN is a string of up to 25 characters; valid characters are 0-9, the  
* character, and the # character. A “:” (colon) is used to separate the address from  
the subaddress if a subaddress is required. All voice port DN/MSN numbers can be  
left empty, be the same, be different, or any combination of those choices. The TA  
uses the Voice DN/MSN to discriminate which analog calls may be answered. It also  
supplies the Calling Party Information Element with a calling party number and  
calling party subaddress if S56 is enabled. If no port number n is given, then the  
assumed port number is that of the port from which the command was received.  
AT*!Nn?<CR> may be used to review the Voice DN/MSN for port n or AT!L<CR>  
may be used to review all Voice DN/MSN port settings. The @CONFIG configuration  
menu can also be used to set and review the Voice DN/MSN port settings.  
RF300E/RF310E  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
D.1.4 Serial Port Configuration Commands  
Use the following commands to control the interaction between the TA and the computer/terminal that  
is connected to it.  
Command: &Cn  
Function:  
Unit:  
DCD Control  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—DCD is forced high at all times.  
n=1—DCD goes from low to high when the TA establishes a connection (DCD  
normal).  
n=2—DCD drops briefly following a disconnect, then goes high again. S-register S10  
defines how long the DCD signal remains low after a disconnect.  
&C1 (DCD normal)  
Default:  
Description: The &Cn command controls the behavior of the DCD (Data Carrier Detect) signal  
(pin 8 on the RS232E/V.24 interface). Normally, DCD goes high when the TA  
establishes a connection, and drops when the connection is lost. However, you can  
also force DCD to remain high at all times, or to remain high except for a brief drop  
following a disconnect.  
Command: &Dn  
Function:  
Unit:  
DTR Control  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—The TA ignores the DTR signal.  
n=1—When DTR goes low, the TA exits data mode and re-enters AT command  
mode.  
n=2—If DTR goes low when the TA is online, then the TA hangs up, returns to  
command mode, and disables auto-answer. If the TA is offline, it neither answers nor  
dials while DTR is low.  
n=3—When DTR goes low, the TA resets the data port and disables auto-answer. If  
DTR goes low when the TA is online, then the TA hangs up, resets the active  
configuration to the stored configuration, and disables auto-answer.  
n=4—Ignore DTR only when answering a data call. If DTR is low when an incoming  
data call is present, then the TA will answer the call. If DTR goes high during that  
call, nothing will happen. However, if DTR goes high and then drops for the minimum  
time specified by S25, then the call will be disconnected just as it would  
with &D1. &D4 is the same as &D1, except that &D4 can answer a data call without  
DTR and DTR can remain low for the duration of the call, but if DTR goes high, then  
&D4 will behave like &D1.  
Default:  
&D1 (exit data mode and re-enter AT command mode)  
Description: The &Dn command controls how the TA responds to the DTR (Data Terminal Ready)  
signal on pin 20 of the RS232E/V.24 interface. A high DTR signal tells the TA that the  
connected computer is ready to communicate. If a call is to be accepted while DTR is  
low, then the TA must be configured to ignore DTR (&D0 or &D4). If this configuration  
setting is not made, the TA rejects incoming calls until DTR is high when the call is  
received.  
Command: $Dn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Persistent DTR Dialing  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0—disable,  
n=1—enable  
Default:  
$D0 (disabled)  
Description: The $Dn command enables or disables Persistent DTR Dialing (PDD). PDD causes  
the terminal adapter to automatically and continuously redial stored telephone  
number 0 when the port has no active calls and DTR is high. The delay after a call  
disconnects (returning to the idle state) yet DTR is still high is controlled by S-  
register S80. Also, once DTR changes from low to high, then a delay set by S80 will  
130  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
occur before dialing begins. See the description of S-register S80 for further details  
regarding its interaction with $Dn.  
Command: &En  
Function:  
Unit:  
Flow Control  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=3—Disable flow control by the TA.  
n=4—Hardware flow control. &E4 causes the TA to use the CTS signal on pin 5 of  
the RS232E/V.24 interface to regulate flow control. When CTS goes low, data flow  
from the computer is suspended until CTS goes high again. This method works with  
pacing, which uses the RTS signal on pin D. Hardware flow control cannot be  
enabled unless an error correction protocol is selected.  
n=5—XON/XOFF flow control. This is an in-band method, in which the XON and  
XOFF characters (^Q and ^S respectively) are inserted into the data stream,  
rather than using separate control lines. When an XOFF character is detected, the  
data stream is suspended until an XON character is detected. The drawback to this  
method is that some files may contain these characters, causing the file transfer to  
be suspended indefinitely.  
n=6—When XON/XOFF pacing is active, the TA responds to and discards the XON/  
XOFF characters from the computer.  
n=7—When XON/XOFF pacing is active, the TA responds to the XON/XOFF  
characters and passes them through the communications link to the remote device,  
thereby  
pacing the remote terminal adapter as well.  
n=12—Disable pacing.  
n=13—Enable pacing.  
Default:  
&E4, &E6, &E13  
Description: The &En command selects the method by which the TA controls the flow of data to  
and from the computer, to prevent either device from accepting data faster than it  
can handle. The TA provides flow control in both directions. When the TA halts data  
flow, it is termed flow control; when the computer halts data flow, it is termed pacing.  
Command: &Rn  
Function:  
Unit:  
CTS Control  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—CTS acts normally; that is, it follows RTS.  
n=1—CTS is forced high, but still provides online flow control.  
n=2—CTS is forced high, but it drops on disconnect for the period of time set by S10.  
CTS still provides flow control when the TA is online.  
&R1 (CTS forced high)  
Default:  
Description: The &Rn command lets you control the state of the CTS (Clear to Send) signal on  
the RS232E/V.24 interface. Normally the CTS signal follows the state of the RTS  
signal when the TA is online.  
Command: &RFn  
Function:  
Unit:  
CTS/RTS Interaction Control  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
Default:  
n=0 (CTS follows RTS when on-line), n=1 (CTS is independent of RTS when on-line)  
&RF1 (CTS is independent of RTS when on-line)  
Description: In normal operation, Clear-to-Send (CTS) follows Request-to-Send (RTS) when the  
modem is on-line. In other words, if RTS goes off, CTS goes off in response. The  
&RF0 command enables CTS to follow RTS. In some applications, however, it may  
be necessary for CTS to operate independently of RTS. &RF1 allows CTS to operate  
independently regardless of the state of RTS, and is the factory default. If this is the  
case, refer to the &R command for control of the Clear-to-Send signal. The &RFn  
command has effect only when using &R0 (CTS acts normally—CTS follows RTS).  
RF300E/RF310E  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Command: &Sn  
Function:  
Unit:  
DSR Control  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—DSR is always high.  
n=1—DSR acts normally; that is, it follows the state of the CD signal, which goes  
high when the TA detects a carrier signal, and goes low when the carrier signal is  
lost.  
n=2—DSR is always high, except on disconnect, when it drops for the period of time  
set by S10 and then goes high again.  
Default:  
&S1 (DSR normal)  
Description: The &Sn command controls the state of the DSR (Data Set Ready) signal on the  
RS232E/V.24 interface. A high DSR signal indicates to the computer that the TA is  
ready to transmit data.  
Command: !SW  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Switch Serial Port Control to TA  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: The !SW command switches the serial port control to the TA. If the TA was already in  
control of the serial port, then the TA will simply report OK. Once the switch is  
complete the port will report OK. This command should be the only command given  
per AT command line. For example, only give the command AT!SW<CR>. Results  
for commands on the line following !SW may not be properly handled especially if  
switching from the modem to the TA.  
Command: *!SW  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Switch Serial Port Control to Modem  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: The *!SW command switches the serial port control to the modem. If the modem was  
already in control of the serial port, then the modem will simply report OK. Once the  
switch is complete the port will report OK. This command should be the only  
command given per AT command line. For example, only give the command  
AT*!SW<CR>. Results for commands on the line following *!SW may not be properly  
handled especially if switching from the TA to the modem.  
Command: #Xn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Send Multiple Xoff Characters  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—One Xoff character sent until the buffer reaches the Xon level  
n=1—Multiple Xoff characters sent for everycharacter received after buffer reaches  
the full level.  
Default:  
#X0  
Description: The #Xn command allows the TA to send either a single or multiple Xoff characters to  
exert flow control to the computer/terminal. The #X0 command causes one Xoff to be  
sent until the TA’s buffer reaches the Xon level. The #X1 command causes an Xoff to  
be sent for every character received after the TA reaches its full buffer level.  
132  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
D.1.5 General Configuration Commands  
Command: @CONFIG  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Configuration Menu  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: The @CONFIG command starts the TA’s internal configuration menus, which you  
can then use to customize the TA’s configuration for your particular application.  
AT@CONFIG<CR> must be entered while in a communication program’s terminal  
mode—it cannot be given as an extra command to a non-terminal application. There  
is help information in the configuration menu and there are also on-screen  
instructions. The ESCAPE key can be used in place of typing “X” or “EXIT” to exit the  
configuration menu. When finished configuring the TA, upon exiting a prompt will ask  
whether or not the configuration is to be saved. A “y”, “Y”, “n”, or “N” is required as  
input. A “y” or “Y” will save the configuration (same as the &W0 command). An “n” or  
“N” will not save the configuration nor will it undo any changes made while in the  
configuration menu. If there was a previous profile saved and changes were made by  
mistake and are to be undone, then give the TA the AT*FS1<CR> command or turn  
off the TA and turn it back on. The previous stored profile will be restored upon reset  
or power-up.  
Command: En  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Command Mode Echo  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0—Echo off,  
n=1—Echo on  
Default:  
E1 (Echo on)  
Description: Normally, when you enter commands on the keyboard, the TA echoes the characters  
back to the computer or terminal, where they are displayed on the monitor. Use the  
En command to turn this feature on and off.  
Command: %En  
Function:  
Unit:  
Escape Sequence Options  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
ESCAPE METHOD  
n=0—Do not escape.  
n=1—”+++” escape method.  
n=2—<BREAK> escape method.  
n=3—Both “+++” and <BREAK> escape methods.  
ESCAPE RESPONSE  
n=4—Disable OK response to “+++”.  
n=5—Enable OK response to “+++”.  
%E1 and %E4  
Default:  
Description: By default, the TA responds only to the “+++” escape method. However, you can use  
the %En command to set the TA to respond only to the <BREAK> method, to  
respond to either the “+++” or the <BREAK> method, or to ignore both methods and  
not escape. If the escape method is enabled (not %E0), then the escape response  
(OK) is given if enabled by %E5. For example, %E1 %E5 enables the “+++” escape  
method and OK response to “+++”.  
RF300E/RF310E  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Command: &Fn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Load Factory Profile  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—Profile 0 (Modem-like operation),  
n=2—Profile 2 (V.120 async operation),  
n=3—Profile 3 (X.75 async operation),  
n=4—Profile 4 (PPP async operation),  
n=5—Profile 5 (HDLC async operation)  
&F0 (Modem-like operation)  
Default:  
Description: For quick setup, the TA includes several Factory Profiles, each of which contains  
configuration parameters for a specific type of port operation. You can load a Factory  
Profile into active memory by using the command &Fn, in which n is the number of  
the profile you wish to load. If you wish, you can then customize the profile and store  
it, using the &W0 command, so that it loads automatically on power-up or reset. The  
Factory Profiles are stored in permanent memory and are not user-configurable.  
(See Section 6.6)  
Command: %Mn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Management Mode  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0 (disable),  
n=1 (enable)  
Default:  
%M0 (disabled)  
Description: Management mode is for use with a management agent. When management mode  
is enabled (%M1) the DSR mode (&Sn) setting is overridden. DSR will be turned off  
when in command mode and off-line. DSR will be turned on when in data mode or  
on-line. !Hn is set to a minimum of 5 seconds (!H5) and *!Hn is set to a minimum of 5  
seconds (*!H5).  
Command: Qn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Quiet Mode  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0—disable,  
n=1—enable  
Default:  
Q0 (disable quiet mode, enable result codes)  
Description: The Qn command controls whether the TA sends result codes to the computer/  
terminal. When quiet mode is disabled (Q0), then result codes are given. When quiet  
mode is enabled, the result codes are suppressed. Use the Vn command to select  
the format of the result codes when quiet mode is disabled (Q0).  
Command: Sr=n  
Function:  
Unit:  
Set S-register  
Varies  
Range:  
Default:  
r varies; n varies  
n/a  
Description: Use the Sr=n command to set the value of an S-register, where r is the number of  
the S-register, and n is the value you want to set. For example, ATS7=60<CR> sets  
S-register 7 to 60. Unsupported S-registers (r) report OK without any numbers.  
Supported S-registers (r) that are given a setting (n) that is not valid return an  
ERROR message. The L6 command gives a summary of all S-registers and their  
current settings. Section D.2 contains the complete list of S-registers and their  
descriptions. Table D.6 gives a summary of the available S-registers.  
134  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
Command: Sr?  
Function:  
Unit:  
Range:  
Default:  
Read S-register  
Varies  
r varies  
n/a  
Description: Use the Sr? command to read the value of an S-register, where r is the number of  
the S-register. For example, ATS7?<CR> gives the current setting of S-register 7.  
The L6 command gives a summary of all S-registers and their current settings.  
Section D.2 contains the complete list of S-registers and their descriptions. Table D-2  
gives a summary of the available S-registers.  
Command: Vn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Terse/Verbose Result Codes  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—enable terse result codes,  
n=1—enable verbose result code  
V1 (Verbose)  
Default:  
Description: Use the Vn command to control whether the TA’s result codes are displayed as digits  
(terse) or as words (verbose). Use the Qn command to enable or disable the display  
of result codes.  
Command: &Wn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Store Active Profile  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—Stores all current AT command and S-register values in nonvolatile random  
access memory (NVRAM) and configures the TA so that it reads your custom  
settings in NVRAM when the modem is turned on or when it is reset with the Z  
command. (The &F reset command continues to read the factory default settings in  
ROM.)  
n=1—Erases custom settings in NVRAM the next time the TA is turned off or reset,  
causing the TA to read the factory default settings in ROM whenever it is turned on or  
reset.  
n-2—Clear all defaults (TA port 1 and TA port 2).  
&W1 (Use factory default profile)  
Default:  
Description: The &Wn command stores your active profile, or configuration, in memory so you  
won’t lose your custom settings when you turn off the TA or reset it.  
Command: Xn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Connect Messages  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—Enables messages OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER, and ERROR (terse  
result codes 0-4).  
n=1—Enables all messages except BUSY (terse result codes 0-5, 10-14, 17-19, 28,  
and 32). If a call is placed to a busy line, the message NO CARRIER is displayed.  
n=2—Enable all messages (terse result codes 0-5, 7, 10-14, 17-19, 28, and 32).  
n=3—Enables all messages except it does not print the protocol messages.  
n=4—Disable printing Calling Line Identification (CLI) at the end of the CONNECT  
message line. This command does not affect X0, X1, or X2.  
n=5—Enable printing Calling Line Identification (CLI) at the end of the CONNECT  
message line. This command does not affect X0, X1, or X2.  
X2 (Enable all messages) and  
Default:  
X4 (Disable printing CLI with CONNECT message)  
Description: Use the Xn command to select which result code messages the TA sends to the  
computer/terminal.  
RF300E/RF310E  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Command:  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Z
Reset to Stored Profile  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: The Z command resets the TA to its current power-up profile and clears the  
command buffer. The result is the same as turning the TA off and on. When you type  
ATZ<CR>, the state of the &W command determines where the default values  
originate. &W0 defaults come from the customized configuration in NVRAM, and  
&W1 defaults come from the factory default configuration in ROM. Because Z clears  
the command buffer, it must be the last command in a command string; normally it is  
issued by itself: ATZ<CR>. Note that whereas the &F0 reset command always  
restores the factory default profile, the Z reset command restores either the factory  
default or the stored profile, depending on how the &W command is set.  
Command: &Zn=x  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Store Telephone Number  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0-9; x=dial string  
n/a  
Description: The &Zn=x command lets you store a telephone number in a memory register for  
faster dialing. To store a number, type &Z, the register number (0-9) where you want  
to store the number, the = character, and the dialing string that you want stored; then  
press <CR>. The dialing string can have up to 25 characters. To read a specific  
stored number, type AT&Zn? (e.g., AT&Z4?) where n is the number of the register  
you want to read. To display the list of all numbers stored in memory, type ATL<CR>.  
Command: !Z=n  
Function:  
Unit:  
Rate Adaption/Data Protocol  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=5—V.120 (async, error detection, error correction)  
n=7—HDLC (async, error detection)  
n=9—PPP (async, error detection)  
n=12—X.75 (async, error detection, error correction)  
!Z=9 (PPP)  
Default:  
Description: The !Z=n command selects the rate adaption protocol used to communicate with  
another TA. The local and remote TAs must be set to the same protocol for  
communication to take place, unless the remote TA supports automatic protocol  
detection. See S52 for a description of automatic protocol detection supported by this  
TA. Some protocols support error correction, such as V.120 and X.75. Other  
protocols, such as PPP, rely on the upper layers (the computer) to handle error  
correction. The TA will allow reception of V.110 calls which will be routed directly to  
the modems. See the description for S-register S83 for further information regarding  
routing of V.110 calls.  
136  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
D.1.6 Digital (Data) Call Commands  
Use these commands to make or configure digital (data) calls.  
Command:  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
A
Answer Digital Call  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: The A command forces the TA to answer an incoming digital call. To cause the TA to  
auto-answer, set register S0 to a value higher than 0.  
Command: Dn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Dial Digital Number  
ASCII  
Values:  
Default:  
n=dial string containing 0-9, “*”, “#”, “&”, “+”, “!”, “-”, “(“, “)”, or “,”  
No dial string  
Description: The D command causes the TA to dial a digital telephone number (e.g., ATD785-  
3500<CR>). The dial string can contain up to 80 characters.  
Command: DSn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Dial Stored Number  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0-9  
DS0 (Dial stored number 0)  
Description: To dial a stored telephone number, type DSn in terminal mode, where n is the  
location of the number you wish to dial. For example, ATDS3<CR> dials a telephone  
stored in memory register 3 location. Stored numbers can be reviewed by giving the  
command ATL<CR>. Numbers can be stored by the use of the &Zn=x command.  
Command: Hn  
Function:  
Values:  
Hang Up Digital Call  
n=0—Go on-hook (hang up)  
n=1—Go off-hook  
H0  
Default:  
Description: The H command forces the TA to go off-hook (to take control of the telephone line) or  
to go on-hook (hang up). Since the TA goes off-hook automatically when it dials, the  
Hn command is normally used only to hang up. To hang up, you must first escape to  
command mode (+++AT<CR>), then type ATH<CR> or ATH0<CR>. You can also  
include the hang up command in the escape sequence: +++ATH<CR>.  
Command: !Hn  
Function:  
Values:  
Digital Call Hold-Off Time Unit: 1 second  
n=0 (disable),  
n=1-255 (1-255 seconds)  
!H0 (disabled)  
Default:  
Description: When a digital call disconnects a timer will be installed that will hold off incoming  
digital calls for the given amount of time (n) for that digital port. Digital calls that are  
received by that port while calls are being held off will not be rejected nor will RING  
messages be given. Rather the digital call will be held in an alerting state until !Hn  
times out at which point the call will begin the normal ringing process. Digital calls  
originated from that port while the !Hn timer is running will abort the timer and the call  
will go out immediately. This command can be very useful for certain RAS  
environments that require at least 1 second to initialize a port after a call has  
disconnected (such as Citrix and Novell). See the troubleshooting section below for  
more information about the use of this feature.  
RF300E/RF310E  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Command:  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
O
Return Online  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: The O command returns the TA to online mode from the online command mode.  
When the TA makes a data connection, it enters online data mode. The TA typically  
remains in this mode until it receives an escape sequence or until the call is ended.  
When it detects an escape sequence, the TA enters online command mode, in which  
it can accept AT commands while retaining the online connection. To return the TA to  
online mode from the online command mode, enter the command ATO<CR>.  
D.1.7 Analog (Modem) Call Commands  
Use these commands to make or configure analog (POTS) calls.  
Command: *An  
Function:  
Unit:  
Answer Analog Call  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0 (Analog Port 0)  
n=1 (Analog Port 1)  
Default:  
*An (n=TA port number which command is given)  
Description: The *An command forces the TA to answer an incoming analog call on analog port n.  
If n is not specified, then n is assumed to be 0.  
Command: *Bn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Send Analog Call Digit  
ASCII  
Values:  
Default:  
n=0-9,A,B,C,D,*,#  
n/a  
Description: The *Bn command forces the TA to send a dial digit to the analog port associated  
with the command port this command is given (Analog Port 0).  
Command: *Dn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Dial Analog Number  
ASCII  
Values:  
Default:  
n=dial string composed of 0-9,A,B,C,D,*,#  
No dial string  
Description: The *Dn command causes the TA to dial an analog telephone number (e.g.,  
AT*D785-3500<CR>). The dial string can contain up to 80 characters.  
Command: *Hn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Hang Up Analog Call  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0 (Analog Port 0),  
n=1 (Analog Port 1)  
Default:  
*Hn (n=TA port number which command is given)  
Description: The *Hn command spoofs the TA into believing the analog port went on-hook (hung  
up).  
Command: *!Hn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Analog Call Hold-Off Time  
1 second  
Values:  
n=0 (disable),  
n=1-255 (1-255 seconds)  
*!H0 (disabled)  
Default:  
Description: When an analog call disconnects a timer will be installed that will hold off incoming  
138  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
analog calls for the given amount of time (n) for that analog port. Analog calls that are  
received by that port while calls are being held off will not be rejected nor will a ring  
be given. Rather the analog call will be held in an alerting state until *!Hn times out  
at which point the call will begin the normal ringing process. Analog calls originated  
from that port while the *!Hn timer is running will abort the timer and the call will go  
out immediately. This command can be very useful for certain RAS environments  
that require at least 1 second to initialize a port after a call has disconnected (such  
as Citrix and Novell). See the troubleshooting section below for more information  
about the use of this feature.  
D.2 S-Registers  
S-registers are sections of memory in which values are stored that affect how the TA operates. S-  
registers are so-called because each has a name that begins with the character S. Use the Sr=n  
command to assign a value to an S-register or use the Sr? command to read the current value of an  
S-register. S-registers are stored in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) by using the &W0 command.  
ATZ<CR> restores S-registers to values stored in NVRAM if any were stored using the &W0  
command, otherwise they revert to factory default settings in ROM. Table D-2 summarizes the  
available S-registers and their function.  
Table D-2. S-Register Summary  
S-Register  
S0  
Function  
Rings Until Answer  
S1  
Ring Count  
S2  
Escape Character  
S3  
S4  
Carriage Return Character  
Line Feed Character  
S5  
Backspace Character  
S7  
S8  
Wait for Connection (Abort Timer)  
Pause Time for Comma  
S10  
S25  
S29  
S30  
S32  
S34  
S50  
S52  
S53  
S54  
S55  
S56  
S57  
S79  
S80  
S81  
S82  
S83  
S84  
S85  
S87  
S89  
S154  
DCD Drop Time  
DTR Drop Time  
On-line Inactivity Timer Period  
On-line Inactivity Timer  
Escape Sequence Timeout  
Maximum Escape Sequence Length  
Caller Line ID (CLI)  
Auto-Protocol Detection  
Maximum X.75 Buffer Size  
B-Channel Origination Rate  
Information Transfer Capability for Analog Port Calls  
Calling Party Number Information Element Settings  
Called Party Number Information Element Settings  
Reset Modem after Disconnect  
Persistent DTR Dialing Delay  
Link Setup Timeout  
Delay Before Trying V.110  
Modems Handle V.110  
Data to Terminal Delay  
Data to B-channel Delay  
INS64 Analog Call Origination Delay  
Modem Ring/Dialtone Information  
B-Channel Answer Rate  
RF300E/RF310E  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
S-Register: S0  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S0=n; S0?  
Number of Rings Until Answer  
1 ring  
Range:  
Default:  
n=0-255 (0-255 rings)  
1 (1 ring)  
Description: S0 sets the number of rings the TA waits for before it answers and begins its connect  
sequence. S0=0 turns off the ability to automatically answer a call. S0=1 causes the  
TA to automatically answer after 1 ring. Note that if the S0 value is set too high, the  
calling device may time out before the TA answers the call. For auto-answer, S0 must  
have a non-zero value, DTR must be high (&Dn command), and the TA must be  
offline.  
S-Register: S1  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S1?  
Ring Count  
1 ring  
Range:  
Default:  
n=0-255 (0-255 rings)  
0 (0 rings)  
Description: S1 counts the number of rings that have occurred, up to a maximum of 255. It is a  
read-only register and is seldom, if ever, used in typical operation. If you set S1 to a  
value other than its default value of zero, or if the value is increasing with rings, this  
new value remains stored in S1 for eight seconds after the last ring is counted, after  
which time the value reverts to zero.  
S-Register: S2  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
Range:  
Default:  
S2=n; S2?  
Escape Character  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0-127  
43 (+)  
Description: S2 specifies the character used by the TA to escape from data mode and return to  
command mode.  
S-Register: S3  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
Range:  
Default:  
S3=n; S3?  
Carriage Return Character  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0-127  
13 (^M)  
Description: S3 specifies the character used by the TA to indicate the end of a command line.  
S-Register: S4  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
Range:  
Default:  
S4=n; S4?  
Line Feed Character  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0-127  
10 (^J)  
Description: S4 specifies the character used by the TA to indicate the end of a status message.  
S-Register: S5  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
Range:  
Default:  
S5=n; S5?  
Backspace Character  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0-32, 127  
8 (^H)  
Description: S5 specifies the character used by the TA to delete the previous character in the  
command line.  
140  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
S-Register: S7  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S7=n; S7?  
Wait for Connection (Abort Timer)  
1 second  
Range:  
n=0-255 (0-255 seconds for all switch types except INS64)  
n=0-50 (0-50 seconds for INS64 switch type)  
45 (45 seconds)  
Default:  
Description: S7 sets the Abort Timer delay time, which is the length of time the TA waits for a  
connection after dialing. If no connection is established during the specified time, the  
TA ends the call. The INS64 switch type limits the maximum delay time to 50  
seconds or less. All other switch types allow up to 255 seconds of delay.  
S-Register: S8  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S8=n; S8?  
Pause Time for Comma  
1 second  
Range:  
Default:  
n=0-255 (0-255 seconds)  
2 (2 seconds)  
Description: S8 sets the length of the pause caused by a comma inserted in a dialing command.  
The default setting is 2 seconds, where each unit is one second. S8 may be set for  
up to 255 seconds.  
S-Register: S10  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S10=n; S10?  
DCD Drop Time  
50 ms  
Range:  
n=0-254 (0-12.75 seconds),  
n=255 (do not disconnect)  
20 (1 second)  
Default:  
Description: S10 sets the time after a carrier signal is lost before the TA disconnects. (The &C2  
command must be in effect.) The default setting is one second. Maximum delay is  
12.75 seconds (S10=254). Set S10 to 255 to cause the TA not to disconnect with  
loss of carrier.  
S-Register: S25  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S25=n; S25?  
DTR Drop Time  
100 ms  
Range:  
n=0 (50ms),  
n=1-255 (100ms-25.5s)  
5 (500ms)  
Default:  
Description: S25 sets the time that DTR must remain low before the TA disconnects. The S25 unit  
value for 0 is 50 ms. For values from 1 through 255, the unit value is 100 ms.  
S-Register: S29  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S29=n; S29?  
On-line Inactivity Timer Period  
0.25 seconds  
Range:  
n=0—does not disconnect  
n=1-255 (0.25-63.75 seconds)  
240 (60 seconds)  
Default:  
Description: S29 sets the on-line inactivity timer period and affects the on-line inactivity timer S30  
by adjusting its unit of time. For example, this allows the inactivity of data calls to be  
timed down to 0.25 seconds and if no data is received within 0.25 seconds the data  
call will disconnect. This is useful for quick connect-disconnects or for continuous  
connect-disconnect cycles when combined with the use of Persistent DTR Dialing  
(PDD). By default the period is 60 seconds (1 minute).  
RF300E/RF310E  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
S-Register: S30  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S30=n; S30?  
On-line Inactivity Timer  
(n * S29 *0.25) seconds (S29=240 by default)  
n=0 (does not disconnect),  
Range:  
n=1-255 (1-255 minutes by default (S29=240))  
0 (does not disconnect)  
Default:  
Description: S30 causes the TA to disconnect a data connection if no data is transmitted or  
received for the specified time. It will NOT cause an analog call (voice/modem/fax) to  
disconnect. The timer will restart any time a data character is passed through the  
serial port (either sent or received). The inactivity timer is disabled by setting S30=0  
or S29=0. By default S30=0, so data calls are not disconnected if sitting idle.  
S-Register: S32  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S32=n; S32?  
Escape Sequence Timeout  
100 ms  
Range:  
Default:  
n=0-255 (0-25.5 seconds)  
20 (2 seconds)  
Description: S32 sets the time allowed in an escape sequence from the receipt of the A in AT to  
the receipt of the carriage return. If the S32 time interval expires before you press  
ENTER, the escape sequence ends. The default time is 2 seconds.  
S-Register: S34  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S34=n; S34?  
Maximum Escape Sequence Length  
1 character  
Range:  
Default:  
0-10 (0-10 characters)  
2 (2 characters after escape sequence)  
Description: S34 sets the maximum character length of the escape sequence, not including  
+++AT. For example a character length of S34=2 allows 2 characters after +++AT  
(e.g., +++ATH0). Conversely, an invalid escape sequence (too many characters  
placed in the command string) would be passed through as data (e.g., +++ATI1I2).  
The maximum length of the escape sequence is 10 characters.  
S-Register: S50  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S50=n; S50?  
Caller Line ID (CLI)  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
n=0 (disable), n=1 (enable with first RING only), n=2 (enable with all RING  
messages)  
Default:  
0 (disabled)  
Description: S50 sets whether the mechanism for identifying the two endpoints of a connection is  
enabled or disabled. Since RING messages only appear for ISDN digital calls, the  
CLI feature does not define a means of conveying Calling Party information to the  
terminal for analog calls. CLI information is included only with the first RING  
message for a given incoming call when S50=1. For example:  
RING  
FM: 5552000 TO: 5551000  
RING  
CLI information is included with all RING messages for a given incoming call  
when S50=2. For example:  
RING  
FM: 5552000 TO: 5551000  
RING  
FM: 5552000 TO: 5551000  
142  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
If the Calling Party Number information is not included in the incoming SETUP  
message, then the RING message appears as follows:  
RING  
TO: 5551000  
If the Called Party Number information is not included in the incoming SETUP  
message, then the RING message appears as follows:  
RING  
FM: 5551000  
If neither the Called Party Number nor Calling Party Number is included in the  
incoming SETUP message, then the RING message contains no additional  
information.  
S-Register: S52  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S52=n; S52?  
Auto-Protocol Detection  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0 (Disable),  
Range:  
n=1 (Detect),  
n=2 (Detect and Select)  
1 (Detect)  
Default:  
Description: S52 enables or disables the ability to identify the reception of V.110, V.120, X.75, or  
PPP data calls. The TA determines the type of call by checking for protocol  
information in the SETUP message or by matching protocol information received on  
the B-channel once connected if no protocol information is available in the SETUP  
message. Once the protocol is determined, the TA will switch its data protocol to  
match. Upon disconnect the TA will revert its data protocol selection back to the  
protocol that was selected before the call was received when S52=1 “Detect”. If  
S52=2 “Detect and Select”, then the TA will not revert the protocol selection, rather it  
will keep the detected data protocol as the new protocol selection. “Detect and  
Select” is useful for applications where the TA receives a call and then the software  
performs callback. Callback calls should be made with the same protocol that was  
used by the client so “Detect and Select” enables this possibility. However, if an  
initialization string or &Fn command is given to the TA that changes the protocol after  
the disconnection, then “Detect and Select” will not be effective. Make sure no  
commands are given to the TA that will change the data protocol when using “Detect  
and Select” if callback is involved to ensure that the callback call uses the correct  
data protocol.  
S-Register: S53  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S53=n; S53?  
Maximum X.75 Buffer Size  
1 bytes  
Range:  
Default:  
n=6D-2048 (6D-2048 bytes)  
2048 (2048 bytes)  
Description: S53 allows the maximum buffer size of an X.75 frame to be customized. Typically a  
smaller frame size is more compatible with software packages on a PC (such as  
HyperTerminal). Larger frame sizes introduce larger delay which some software  
cannot deal with appropriately.  
S-Register: S54  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S54=n; S54?  
B-Channel Origination Rate  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
n=0 (64Kbps, but use Progress Indicator IE)  
n=56 (56Kbps)  
n=64 (64Kbps)  
Default:  
0 (64Kbps, but use Progress Indicator IE)  
RF300E/RF310E  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Description: S54 allows the ability to force the TA to originate digital calls with a 56Kbps or  
64Kbps B-channel data rate. In some situations it is necessary to force a 56Kbps  
connection. Such a situation may occur when an originated call fails to connect  
because the end-to-end connection is not 64Kbps and the originating TA or the  
answering TA is not informed of this situation by the network. In some situations it is  
necessary to force a 64Kbps connection when the originating TA is first informed that  
the call changed 56Kbps but then later returned to the ISDN and switched back to  
64Kbps. By default the TA will check for Progress Indicator Information Elments  
indicating changes in the routing of digital calls to determine whether the call needs  
to switch to 56Kbps or remain at 64Kbps.  
S-Register: S55  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S55=n; S55?  
Information Transfer Capability for Analog Port Calls  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
n=1 (Speech, no progress indicator),  
n=2 (3.1KHz Audio, no progress indicator),  
n=17 (Speech, Origination address is Non-ISDN),  
n=18 (3.1KHz Audio, Origination address is Non-ISDN)  
1 (Speech, no progress indicator)  
Default:  
Description: S55 allows the ability to set the type of Information Transfer Capability for calls  
placed from the analog port either by a telephone, modem, or fax. Some Central  
Office switches keep track of the type of line each customer has and if that line is  
labeled as a data line (modem or fax), then it won’t accept a speech call originated  
on that line. The 3.1KHz Audio Information Transfer Capability, however, is allowed  
on data lines (modem or fax) by most switches. S55 also allows the user to indicate  
whether a progress indicator information element indicating that the origination  
address of the analog call is non-ISDN is sent with the SETUP message for the  
analog port call. This has been found to help analog port calls get through certain  
switches.  
S-Register: S56  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S56=n; S56?  
Calling Party Number IE Settings  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
n=128 (Disable),  
n=129 (Send Calling Party Number IE using defaults) Otherwise, n=(Type of  
Number) + (Numbering Plan)  
* Type of Number  
0—unknown,  
16—international,  
32—national,  
48—network specific,  
64—subscriber,  
96—abbreviated  
* Numbering Plan  
0—unknown,  
1—ISDN/telephony,  
3—data,  
4—telex,  
8—national standard,  
9—private  
Default:  
128 (Disabled)  
Description: S56 modifies the value of Octet 3 of the Calling Party Number Information Element  
that is sent within the SETUP message for digital and analog (voice/modem/fax)  
calls. To set a specific number-type and numbering plan, select an option from the  
Type of Number section above and add its respective value to the respective value of  
144  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
an option in the Numbering Plan section above. For example, a National/ISDN  
Calling Party Number IE would be S56=33, where 32 (national) + 1 (ISDN/telephony)  
= 33 (National/ISDN). If there is no Data DN/MSN 1 stored (for digital calls) nor Voice  
DN/MSN given (for voice/modem/fax calls), then no Calling Party Number IE will be  
sent. By default S56=128 which means no Calling Party Number IE is sent. If  
S56=129, then the Calling Party Number IE will be sent (if the appropriate DN/MSN  
is stored) with the default Type of Number and Numbering Plan used for the given  
switch type.  
S-Register: S57  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S57=n; S57?  
Called Party Number IE Settings  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
n=128 (Disable), Otherwise, n=(Type of Number) + (Numbering Plan)  
Type of Number  
0—unknown,  
16—international,  
32—national,  
48—network specific,  
64—subscriber,  
96—abbreviated  
Numbering Plan  
0—unknown,  
1—ISDN/telephony,  
3—data,  
4—telex,  
8—national standard,  
9—private  
Default:  
128 (disabled)  
Description: S57 modifies the value of Octet 3 of the Called Party Number Information Element  
that is sent within the SETUP message for a data call and within each  
INFORMATION message that is sent when dialing from the POTS port. Called Party  
Number Information Elements are sent only by the NET3, VN4, and INS64 switch  
types. To set a specific number-type and numbering plan, select an option from the  
Type of Number section above and add its respective value to the respective value of  
an option in the Numbering Plan section above. For example, a National/ISDN Called  
Party Number IE would be S57=33, where 32 (national) + 1 (ISDN/telephony) = 33  
(National/ISDN). By default S57=128 which means no Called Party Number IE is  
sent.  
S-Register: S79  
S79=n; S79?  
Function:  
Unit:  
Reset Modem After Disconnect  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
n=0 (Do not reset the modem),  
n=1 (Reset the modem)  
Default:  
0 (Do not reset the modem)  
Description: S79 allows control of whether the modems associated with the TA port given this  
command will reset the modem upon disconnection of the B-channel. The modem is  
reset upon disconnect simply to make sure the modem is functioning from a known  
state to reduce problems. Also, the modem may not know when the remote peer  
disconnects if the B-channel drops before proper disconnect signaling is recognized  
by the modem. Because of this, the modem may not disconnect for almost one  
minute and so resetting the modem when the B-channel disconnects reduces down-  
time for the modem. Refer to S-register S-83 for a description of which TA ports  
affect which modem ports. Resetting a modem takes it out of service for about four  
seconds. Some operating systems and some applications have difficulty with the  
RF300E/RF310E  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
modem being reset because of the change of the EIA serial signals and so disabling  
the reset may be required. By default, the TA does not rest the modems upon B-  
channel disconnection.  
S-Register: S80  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S80=n; S80?  
Persistent DTR Dialing Delay  
1 second  
Range:  
n=0 (no delay),  
n=1-255 (1-255 seconds)  
Default:  
0 (no delay) Description: Once DTR is detected as present (active high) and other  
conditions required for the TA to dial are met, a delay of S80 seconds will occur  
before stored number 0 is dialed. Some conditions include the TA not being in the  
@CONFIG configuration menu, not having a data call present at the time, and  
Persistent DTR Dialing must be enabled. By default the TA will not delay before  
dialing when all conditions are satisfied.  
S-Register: S81  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S81=n; S81?  
Link Setup Timeout  
100ms  
Range:  
n=0 (discard pending call),  
n=1-255 (100ms-25.5s)  
Default:  
30 (3 seconds) for the INS64 switch type  
10 (1 second) for all other switch types  
Description: When all layers are down and no TEI’s are assigned or the switch dropped the TEI’s  
without informing the TA, then when there is an incoming call or the TA attempts to  
originate a call it must first bring up Layer 1, Layer 2, and request a TEI. If for some  
reason the switch does not respond to the request for a TEI or none of the layers  
come up successfully, then the TA should timeout and report NO CARRIER or NO  
DIALTONE. By default S81 allows 3 seconds (INS64 switch type) or 1 second (all  
other switch types) for the link to set up. Typically the link is set up within 2 seconds  
for the INS64 switch type and 200ms for all other switch types.  
S-Register: S82  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S82=n; S82?  
Delay Before Trying V.110  
100ms  
Range:  
Default:  
n=5-255 (500ms-25.5s)  
40 (4 seconds)  
Description: S82 was added to allow flexibility in the amount of time the TA is given to detect non-  
V.110 data protocols when answering a digital using Auto-Protocol Detection (S52=1  
or S52=2). By default there is a D-second period after connecting for the TA to detect  
the data protocol being used by the client. If V.110 support is available to the TA, then  
after S82*100ms of not being able to determine the data protocol of the client the TA  
will assume that the call is V.110. However, some TAs do not send data on a B-  
channel within 4 seconds. If the client did not call in using V.110, then the TA will  
disconnect the call 10 seconds after switching to V.110. Increasing S82 will  
eventually yield success.  
S-Register: S83  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S83=n; S83?  
Modems Handle V.110  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
n=0 (disable),  
n=1 (enable—modems handle V.110)  
1 (enable—modems handle V.110)  
Default:  
146  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
Description: S83 controls whether or not the modems will handle possible V.110 calls. If S83=0,  
then it will not be assumed that the modems support V.110 and the V.110 call will fail.  
Auto-protocol detection is required to be enabled on the TA port that corresponds to  
the modem port that is intended to answer V.110 calls. If the corresponding TA port is  
busy, then the call will roll over to the next TA port on the same BRI. The port setup is  
as follows:  
Port 1—TA#1 Port 1 or Modem #1, BRI#1  
Port 2—TA#1 Port 2 or Modem #2, BRI#1  
Port 3—TA#2 Port 1 or Modem #3, BRI#2  
Port 4—TA#2 Port 2 or Modem #4, BRI#2  
Port 5—TA#3 Port 1 or Modem #5, BRI#3  
Port 6—TA#3 Port 2 or Modem #6, BRI#3  
For example, if Modem #1 is intended to answer V.110 calls, then S83=1 must be  
given to TA#1 Port 1. By default the TA will send V.110 calls to the modems.  
S-Register: S84  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S84=n; S84?  
Data to Terminal Delay  
10ms  
Range:  
n=0 (no delay),  
n=1-255 (10ms-2.55s)  
0 (no delay)  
Default:  
Description: S84 controls the delay time for data sent from the TA to the terminal. The timer for  
this S-register is started at the time the CONNECT message is printed. Any data  
received from the B-channel after the CONNECT message but before the timer  
expires is stored in a queue in the order in which it is received. Once the timer  
expires, any queued data will be sent to the terminal in the order in which it was  
received. This delay timer is useful for use with some applications that are not ready  
for to receive data too soon after the CONNECT message is given.  
S-Register: S85  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S85=n; S85?  
Data to B-channel Delay  
10ms  
Range:  
n=0 (no delay),  
n=1-255 (10ms-2.55s)  
0 (no delay)  
Default:  
Description: S85 controls the delay time for data sent from the TA to the appropriate B-channel.  
The timer for this S-register is started at the time the CONNECT message is printed.  
Any data received from the terminal after the CONNECT message but before the  
timer expires is stored in a queue in the order in which it is received. Once the timer  
expires, all queued data will be sent to the appropriate B-channel in the order in  
which it was received.  
S-Register: S87  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S87=n; S87?  
En-bloc Analog Call Origination Delay  
100ms  
Range:  
Default:  
n=0-255 (0-25.5s)  
10 (1 second)  
Description: S87 allows flexibility of the amount of time given to the period after a digit is dialed  
before an analog call is sent to the network for processing. S87 is only used when  
the dialing method is En-bloc (%A97=0). When a device goes off-hook on the  
analog port, the TA generates a dial tone (rather than the network generating a dial  
tone). Once a digit is dialed, a timer is started. If another digit is received before the  
timer reaches the S87 value, then the timer is reset. If the timer reaches the value  
determined by S87, then the TA assumes that no more digits are to be dialed and the  
TA will send the SETUP message with the dialed number to the network for  
RF300E/RF310E  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
processing. By default the TA will not send the SETUP message until 1 second after  
the last digit is received from the device.  
S-Register: S89  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S89=n; S89?  
Modem Ring/Dialtone Information  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
n=0 (standard ring/dialtone),  
n=1 (indicates A-law or u-law)  
1 (indicates A-law or u-law)  
Default:  
Description: The ring and dialtone signals sent to the modems indicate various types of  
information. In the case of analog calls, they may be used to indicate the type of  
coding required by the modem to properly communicate with the remote modem.  
The type of call may be A-law or u-law and depends on the switch type. Previous to  
S89 a standard ring and dialtone were sent to the modem in which case the modem  
would answer or originate the call according to its coding setting (S108=0 is u-law  
and S108=1 is A-law for Lucent CSM). S89 was added to bypass the need to  
manually set the type of coding (S108) in the modem when receiving or originating  
calls. With S89 set to 1 (indicates A-law or u-law), then modem firmware newer than  
2.10Q is required. If a modem call is attempted and the modem does not support the  
new A-law/u-law detection, then the modem will print NO DIALTONE when  
originating a call and it will print a RING when receiving a call. To resolve this, then  
set S89=0 on all TA ports. This will cause the TA to revert to previous ring and  
dialtone signaling compatible with older modem firmware (2.06I, 2.09B, and 2.10Q).  
S-Register:  
Usage:  
S154  
S154=n; S154?  
Function:  
Unit:  
B-Channel Answer Rate  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
n=0 (64Kbps, but use Progress Indicator IE),  
n=1 (64Kbps, ignore Progress Indicator IE, check Bearer Capability IE),  
n=56 (56Kbps),  
n=64 (64Kbps)  
Default:  
0 (64Kbps, but use Progress Indicator IE)  
Description:  
S154 allows the ability to force the TA to answer digital calls with a 56Kbps or  
64Kbps B-channel rate. In some situations it is necessary to force a 56Kbps  
connection. Such a situation may occur when a call fails to connect because the  
end-to-end connection is not 64Kbps and the originating TA or the answering TA is  
not infomred of this situation by the network. In some situations it is necessary to  
force a 64Kbps conection when the TA is first informed that the call changed to  
56Kbps but then later returned to the ISDN and switched back to 64Kbps. It may be  
more likely that setting S154=1 is the best solution to the “not end-to-end ISDN”  
message given by the network. In this case (S154=1), the TA will assume 64Kbps  
unless the Bearer Capability Information Element indicates a 56Kbps connection.  
The TA will then ignore all Progress Indicator Information Elements when S154=1.  
By default the TA will check for Progress Indicator Information Elements indicating  
changes in the routing of digital calls to determine whether the call needs to switch to  
56Kbps or remain at 64Kbps.  
148  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
D.3 Result Codes  
When the TA receives an AT command from the computer or terminal, it attempts to execute the  
command, then sends a status message to the computer or terminal that reports the result of the  
command. The TA provides you with several of these response messages, or result codes, which can  
be displayed on your monitor or intercepted and used by your communications software. Using the  
Vn command, you can select whether the result codes are terse (numbers) or verbose (words).  
The TA’s result codes are listed in the following table. Note that the speed of an ISDN B-channel is  
always either 56Kbps (CONNECT 56000) or 64Kbps (CONNECT 64000) unless the call is a V.110  
call in which case the reported connection speed with be that of the V.110 network rate.  
Table D-3. Result Codes  
Terse Verbose  
OK  
Definition  
0
The TA executed the command without error.  
The TA has established an ISDN connection.  
The TA has detected a ring caused by an incoming call.  
The TA did not detect a carrier within the time allotted by register S7.  
There was an error in the AT command.  
1
2
CONNECT  
RING  
3
4
NO CARRIER  
ERROR  
6
7
NO DIALTONE The TA has a poor connection to the ISDN network.  
BUSY The TA has detected a busy signal.  
56  
64  
P
V
X
H
CONNECT 56000 The TA has connected at 56000 bps.  
CONNECT 64000 The TA has connected at 64000 bps.  
/PPP  
The TA is using the Point-to-Point protocol.  
The TA is using the V.120 rate adaption protocol.  
The TA is using the X.75 rate adaption protocol.  
The TA is using the HDLC protocol.  
/V.120  
/X.75  
/HDLC  
RF300E/RF310E  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
D.4 Troubleshooting the TA  
D.4.1 Specific Troubleshooting Situations  
SITUATION 1: The !Hn and *!Hn commands can be very useful for certain RAS environments that  
require at least 1 second to initialize a port after a call has disconnected (such as  
Citrix and Novell). For example, when a call disconnects, Citrix and Novell will begin  
initializing the port that just disconnected. However, it typically takes more than 1  
second and during that time a call may be received by the digital or analog port.  
When this happens, Citrix and Novell do not answer the call nor do they finish the  
initialization process. To prevent this problem, setting !H5 and/or *!H5 will set the TA  
to hold of digital and/or analog calls for 5 seconds after the respective port(s)  
disconnect(s). This should give enough time for the digital and/or analog port to be  
initialized by Citrix or Novell and enter the “waiting for a call” state.  
D.4.2 Debugging/Logging/Troubleshooting Commands  
The AT commands in this section can be used in attempting to troubleshoot or debug a current  
problem. Some commands may be enhanced or limited by the debugging/logging/troubleshooting  
S-registers described in section D.4.3.  
Table D-4. Debugging/Logging/Troubleshooting Command Summary  
AT Command  
>Dn  
*FSn  
Function  
Embedded Protocol Analyzer (EPA)  
Reset TA  
*Ln  
>LOG  
>Sn  
Fatal Error Information  
Display Logging Buffer Contents  
Logging Variables  
>TIME  
*V  
Display Current Timestamp  
Various State Information  
Command: >Dn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Embedded Protocol Analyzer (EPA)  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
ANALYZER/DECODER COMMANDS  
n=0—-Displays B-channel data using V.120 decoder  
n=1—-Displays Layer 2 & 3 data using Q.921 & Q.931decoders  
n=2—-Displays Layer 2 data using Q.921 decoder  
n=3—-Displays complete Layer 3 data using long-form Q.931 decoder  
n=38—Displays Layer 3 data using short-form Q.931 decoder with hex data  
n=39—Displays Layer 3 data using short-form Q.931 decoder  
n=4—-Displays B-channel data using X.75 decoder  
n=5—-Displays Asynchronous Port data using PPP decoder  
n=51—Displays Asynchronous Port data as raw asynchronous PPP data  
n=6—-Displays B-channel data using PPP decoder  
n=61—Displays B-channel data as raw synchronous PPP data  
n=7—-Displays B-channel data in raw hexadecimal form  
n=8—-Displays Layer 1 data using I.430 decoder EMBEDDED PROTOCOL  
ANALYZER (EPA) INITIALIZATION COMMANDS  
n=98—Disables saving to the decode buffer  
n=99—Initializes the decode buffer and begins saving all data specified by S102  
n/a  
Default:  
Description: The Embedded Protocol Analyzer (EPA) records and analyzes various protocols on  
the B-channel, D-channel, and DTE-DCE interface. The EPA is useful as a  
diagnostic tool, in that essential data messages are displayed. This offers the ability  
to observe interactive operations of the TA, Central Office, and remote  
150  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
communications equipment. All EPA information stored in the decode buffer contains  
a timestamp. The timestamp has the form [DD, HH:MM:SS:mmm] where DD is the  
day, HH is the hour, MM is the minute, SS is the second, and mmm is the millisecond  
at which the information was recorded. This time is the time since the TA was  
powered on or reset. For example, when the TA is powered on, the first immediate  
timestamp would be [00, 00:00:00:000]. Three minutes after power-on the timestamp  
would be [00, 00:03:00:000]. Timestamping is useful for aiding in cross-referencing  
the order of events between the logging buffer and decode buffer. It is also useful for  
determining the amount of time between events in question. Refer to S-register S102  
for details on what types of information can be stored or ignored—useful for focusing  
on a certain type of information.  
Command: *FSn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Reset TA  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—reset and delay in boot code  
n=1-255—reset immediately  
*FS0 (reset and delay in boot code)  
Default:  
Description: *FSn may be used to perform a quick reset of the TA without powering it off and on.  
For any value of n other than 0, the TA will reset immediately (most commonly *FS1  
is used).  
Command: *Ln  
Function:  
Unit:  
Fatal Error Information  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=blank—display fatal error information  
n=1—perform a fatal error  
n=2—reset fatal error information  
*L (display fatal error information)  
Default:  
Description: *L displays the most recent fatal errors. *Ln may be used to perform a pseudo fatal  
error or reset the fatal error information.  
Command: >LOG  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Display Logging Buffer Contents  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: >LOG displays the logging buffer contents. Without the source code, some  
information is still useful to the user. However, when debugging problems the source  
code relevant to the build (version/model) of the firmware is necessary. All log_msg()  
information stored in the logging buffer contains a timestamp. The timestamp has the  
form [DD, HH:MM:SS:mmm] where DD is the day, HH is the hour, MM is the minute,  
SS is the second, and mmm is the millisecond at which the information was  
recorded. This time is the time since the TA was powered on or reset. For example,  
when the TA is powered on, the first immediate timestamp would be [00,  
00:00:00:000]. Three minutes after power-on the timestamp would be [00,  
00:03:00:000]. Timestamping is useful for aiding in cross-referencing the order of  
events between the logging buffer and decode buffer. It is also useful for determining  
the amount of time between events in question.  
Command:  
Function:  
Unit:  
>Sn=x, >S?  
Logging Buffer Commands and Variables  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
LOGGING COMMANDS  
n=98,x=0—Stop logging to buffer  
n=99,x=0—Clear logging buffer  
n=255,x=0—Disable all logging variables  
n=255,x=1—Enable all logging variables  
RF300E/RF310E  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
LOGGING VARIABLES (n)  
n=Varies, so use >S? to get available listing  
x=0—disable variable n  
x=1—enable variable n  
n/a  
Default:  
Description: The Logging Buffer stores debug/trace information that may be relevant to capturing  
a bug or troubleshooting interoperability problems. The logging variables correspond  
to logging variables in the source code and as such the logging buffer contents  
require the source code when tracing events or problems.  
Command: >TIME  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Display Current Timestamp  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: >TIME displays the current timestamp which is the time since the TA was powered  
on or reset. The timestamp has the form [DD, HH:MM:SS:mmm] where DD is the  
day, HH is the hour, MM is the minute, SS is the second, and mmm is the number of  
milliseconds. The maximum value of the timestamp is [49, 17:02:47.295] which is 49  
days, 17 hours, 2 minutes, 47 seconds, and 295 milliseconds. When the maximum  
timestamp value is reached, the timestamp restarts at [00, 00:00:00.000].  
Command: *V  
Function:  
Unit:  
Values:  
Default:  
Various State Information  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Description: *V displays analog port state information, digital port state information, NLS state  
information, LAP state information, and I.430 state information.  
D.4.3 Debugging/Logging/Troubleshooting S-Registers  
The S-registers in this section can be used in attempting to troubleshoot, debug, or even correct a  
current problem. Some S-registers modify functionality of various features. Some S-registers modify  
the functionality of the debugging/logging/troubleshooting commands described in section D.4.2.  
D-5. Debugging/Logging/Troubleshooting S-Register Summary  
S-register  
S92  
S93  
Function  
Channel ID Information Element Octet 3 Settings  
Blacklisting  
S94  
S95  
S96  
S98  
Minimum Buffer Space After Trigger  
Logging Buffer Functionality  
Decode (EPA) Buffer Functionality  
ISDN_MSG Size  
S99  
Startup Options  
S100  
S101  
S102  
S103  
S104  
S105  
Flow Control High Threshold  
Flow Control Low Threshold  
Data to Save for Decoding  
Real-Time Decoding Display  
Real-Time Decoding  
Real-Time Logging  
152  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
S-Register: S92  
Usage:  
S92=n; S92?; S92.b=n; S92.?  
b=bit number, n=value  
Function:  
Unit:  
Channel ID Information Element Octet 3 Settings  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
bit 6—Interface ID present  
bit 5—Interface Type  
bit 4—0 spare  
bit 3—Preferred/Exclusive  
0 = Preferred  
1 = Exclusive  
bit 2—D-channel Indicator  
bit 1—Info. Channel Selection  
bit 0—Info. Channel Selection  
00 = No Channel  
01 = B1 Channel  
10 = B2 Channel  
11 = Any Channel  
Default:  
3 (00000011 binary) Preferred, Any Channel  
Description: S92 allows octet 3 of the Channel Identification Information Element to be modified,  
but currently only bits 3,1, and 0 can be modified. Bit 3 controls the Preferred/  
Exclusive setting. Bits 1 and 0 control the Information Channel Selection. To force a  
call on B2, set bit 3 to 1 (S92.3=1), set bit 1 to 1 (S92.1=1), and set bit 0 to 0  
(S92.0=0)—or simply set S92=10 which does the same as setting each bit  
individually. By default, the Channel ID is preferred/any channel.  
S-Register:  
Usage:  
S93  
S93=n; S93?  
Blacklisting  
Function:  
Unit:  
Decimal ASCII code  
n=0 (Disable),  
n=1 (Enable)  
1 (Enabled)  
Range:  
Default:  
Description: S93 determines whether blacklisting is enabled or disabled. Blacklisting currently  
only affects the NET3 and INS64 switch types. For Australia (NET3) and Japan  
(INS64), blacklisting is required. For Europe (NET3), blacklisting may be disabled if  
it becomes a problem by setting S93=0. By default, blacklisting is enabled for NET 3  
and INS64, however, it should be rare that blacklisting occurs.  
S-Register: S94  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S94=n; S94?  
Minimum Buffer Space After Trigger  
10 bytes  
Range:  
Default:  
n=0-255 (0-2550 bytes)  
10 (100 bytes)  
Description: When S95 and/or S96 are set to continuously store information until a specific event  
(or trigger) occurs, then once that trigger occurs a minimum number of bytes will be  
freed (if needed) in the respective buffer. S94 sets the minimum number of bytes  
requested to be freed in the respective buffer once a trigger has occurred. By default  
a minimum of 100 bytes are freed in the respective buffer.  
S-Register: S95  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S95=n; S95?  
Logging Buffer Functionality  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
n=0—Stop when full,  
n=1—Wrap continuously,  
*** The Following Are Triggers ***  
RF300E/RF310E  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
n=2—Line Not Ready  
Default:  
0 (Stop when full)  
Description: The logging buffer has the capability “Stop when full,” “Wrap continuously,” or  
continuously store information until a specific event (or trigger) occurs. “Stop when  
full” causes the TA to stop accepting new information when the buffer is full. “Wrap  
continuously” will always accept new information into the buffer, but the oldest  
information will be thrown away to make room for the new information. Specifying a  
trigger will set the TA to wrap continuously, however once the specified event (or  
trigger) occurs, then the TA will free a minimum number of bytes specified by S94  
and then stop when the buffer is full. ATS95?<CR> will give further information about  
the logging buffer such as the number of bytes in the buffer, the type of trigger in use,  
and whether the trigger has occurred. AT>LOG<CR> retrieves the logging  
information. AT>S99=0<CR> clears the buffer. By default the logging buffer will stop  
accepting information when the buffer is full.  
S-Register: S96  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S96=n; S96?  
Decode (EPA) Buffer Functionality  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
n=0—Stop when full,  
n=1—Wrap continuously,  
*** The Following Are Triggers ***  
n=2—Line Not Ready  
0 (Stop when full)  
Default:  
Description: The decode buffer has the capability “Stop when full,” “Wrap continuously,” or  
continuously store information until a specific event (or trigger) occurs. “Stop when  
full” causes the TA to stop accepting new information when the buffer is full. “Wrap  
continuously” will always accept new information into the buffer, but the oldest  
information will be thrown away to make room for the new information. Specifying a  
trigger will set the TA to wrap continuously, however once the specified event (or  
trigger) occurs, then the TA will free a minimum number of bytes specified by S94  
and then stop when the buffer is full. ATS96?<CR> will give further information about  
the decode buffer such as the number of bytes in the buffer, the type of trigger in use,  
and whether the trigger has occurred. >Dn commands retrieve the decode  
information. AT>D99<CR> clears the buffer. By default the decode buffer will stop  
accepting information when the buffer is full.  
S-Register: S98  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S98=n; S98?  
ISDN_MSG Size  
1 byte  
Range:  
Default:  
n=0-255 (0-255 bytes)  
50 (50 bytes)  
Description: Sets the maximum number of bytes per packet that are stored in the decode buffer.  
Since the decode buffer has a limited size it is useful to “see” a broader picture rather  
than each packet in detail. Data packets may typically be larger than 255 bytes. By  
default only 50 bytes per packet are stored.  
S-Register: S99  
Usage:  
S99=n; S99?; S99.b=n; S99.?  
b=bit number, n=value  
Function:  
Unit:  
Startup Options  
Decimal ASCII code  
Range:  
bit 0—Initialize the Logging buffer,  
bit 1—Initialize the EPA buffer,  
bit 2—Save to Log buffer (same as >S99=0),  
bit 3—Save to EPA buffer (same as >D99),  
154  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
bit 4—Save logging (>Sn) flags,  
bit 5—Allow tst_CheckPoint() calls  
7 (Init Log, Init EPA, Save to Log)  
Default:  
Description: S99 controls startup features. If buffers are set to not be initialized, then if the TA  
resets those buffers will not be initialized and thus the data can be retrieved  
(assuming that >S99=0 or >D99 were given prior to the reset or fatal error). If the TA  
will be reset several times, but the data should be kept after each reset, then the  
buffers should not be initialized (except to initially give the >S99=0 and/or >D99  
command) and the save to EPA and/or save to Log bits would need to be set. The  
“Save logging flags” bit when set will store the >Sn logging flag settings in the  
E2PROM so that on power-up those flags will be set and logging can begin  
immediately. When the bit is cleared, the >Sn flags are not modified nor will the flags  
be changed from default when the TA powers up. tst_CheckPoint() helps in the  
debugging of an unrecoverable fatal error or power-up problem.  
S-Register: S100  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S100=n; S100?  
Flow Control High Threshold  
1 buffer  
Range:  
Default:  
n=0-255 (0-255 buffers)  
varies  
Description: S100 may be used to increase or decrease the high threshold for flow control (the  
point at which flow control is asserted).  
S-Register: S101  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S101=n; S101?  
Flow Control Low Threshold  
1 buffer  
Range:  
Default:  
n=0-255 (0-255 buffers)  
varies  
Description: S101 may be used to increase or decrease the low threshold for flow control (the  
point at which flow control is negated).  
S-Register: S102  
Usage:  
S102=n; S102?; S102.b=n; S102.?  
b=bit number, n=value  
Data to Save for Decoding  
Decimal ASCII code  
Function:  
Unit:  
Range:  
bit 0—Layer 1  
bit 1—Layer 2 (D)  
bit 2—Layer 3 (D)  
bit 3—B1  
bit 4—B2  
bit 5—Async Port 1  
Default:  
127 (Layer 1, Layer 2, Layer 3, B1, B2, Async Ports 1)  
Description: S102 allows complete control over the types of data stored in RAM for decoding at a  
later time and/or the types of data allowed for Real-Time Decoding. “Layer 1”  
consists of the I.430 state transitions and events (decoded by >D8). “Layer 2”  
consists of the Q.921 messages sent and received on the D-channel (decoded by  
>D2). “Layer 3” consists of the Q.931 messages sent and received on the D-channel  
(decoded by >D3, >D38, or >D39). B1 consists of digital data sent and received on  
B-channel 1 (decoding depends on data protocol). B2 consists of digital data sent  
and received on B-channel 2 (decoding depends on data protocol). Async Port 1  
consists of data sent and received between port 1 of the TA and the asynchronous  
terminal (decoded by >D5 if PPP). S102? will give bit-level details of this S-register.  
Refer to the >Dn command for details on decoding data stored in RAM. By default all  
options (bits) are enabled (set to 1).  
RF300E/RF310E  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
S-Register: S103  
Usage:  
S103=n; S103?; S103.b=n; S103.?  
b=bit number, n=value  
Real-Time Decoding Display  
Decimal ASCII code  
bit 0—Layer 1  
Function:  
Unit:  
Range:  
bit 1—Layer 2  
bit 2—Layer 3 short  
bit 3—Layer 3 long  
bit 4—Raw B1  
bit 5—Raw B2  
bit 6—Decode B1  
bit 7—Decode B2  
Default:  
0 (None decoded and displayed)  
Description: S103 selects the type(s) of data to decode in real-time. If a certain type of data is to  
be decoded in real-time according to S103 and S102 allows that data to be decoded,  
then that data type will not be stored in RAM for later decoding via >Dn commands.  
Data types not decoded in real-time according to S103 yet S102 allows the data type  
to be decoded will be stored in RAM for later decoding via >Dn commands. “Layer 1”  
outputs decoded I.430 state transitions and events (decoded by >D8). “Layer 2”  
outputs decoded Q.921 information sent and received on the D-channel (decoded by  
>D2). “Layer 3 short” outputs Q.931 messages sent and received on the D-channel,  
but only the message-type and not the Information Elements is decoded (decoded by  
>D39). “Layer 3 long” outputs decoded Q.931 messages sent and received on the D-  
channel (decoded by >D3). If both “Layer 3 short” and “Layer 3 long” are enabled,  
then “Layer 3 long” will override “Layer 3 short.” “Raw B1” outputs raw hexadecimal  
data sent and received on B-channel 1—similar to the >D7 command. “Raw B2”  
outputs raw hexadecimal data sent and received on B-channel 2—similar to the >D7  
command. “Decode B1” outputs decoded data protocol information sent and received  
on B-channel 1 only if the data protocol is V.120 or X.75. “Decode B2” outputs  
decoded data protocol information sent and received on B-channel 2 only if the data  
protocol is V.120 or X.75. By default all options (bits) are disabled (set to 0).  
S-Register: S104  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S104=n; S104?  
Real-Time Decoding  
10ms  
Range:  
n=0 (Real-Time Decoding Disabled),  
n=1-255 (10ms-2.55s)  
0 (Real-Time Decoding Disabled)  
Default:  
Description: If S104 is set to a non-zero value, then Real-Time Decoding will be enabled on the  
port to which it was given. For autobauding devices, the serial rate will then be fixed  
at the rate of the command given. The delay before displaying decoded information  
can be set from 10ms to 2.55 seconds. When there is a great deal of activity in the  
TA it is probably best to set for a higher delay, but generally S104=1 (10ms of delay)  
is good at a serial rate of 115200. If there is too much activity in the data types  
allowed by S102 and S103, then some decoded information will be thrown away until  
the activity allows decoding to continue. If DTR is negated (judged by the setting of  
&Dn), then decoded information will also be thrown away. The number of decoded  
information buffers that are thrown away are kept track of by wNumTracesDenied,  
which can be viewed by giving the command ATS96?<CR>. wNumTracesDenied is  
reset to 0 upon power-up and whenever S104 is set to a non-zero value. If Real-  
Time Logging is enabled and the ports to which Real-Time Logging and Real-Time  
Decoding are enabled match (I.E. giving both commands S104=1 and S105=1 to  
port 1), then the real-time logging information and the real-time decoding information  
will be merged in sequence according to the time-stamp. By default Real-Time  
Decoding is disabled.  
156  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
S-Register: S105  
Usage:  
Function:  
Unit:  
S105=n; S105?  
Real-Time Logging  
10ms  
Range:  
n=0 (Real-Time Logging Disabled),  
n=1-255 (10ms-2.55s)  
0 (Real-Time Logging Disabled)  
Default:  
Description: If S105 is set to a non-zero value, then Real-Time Logging will be enabled on the  
port to which it was given. For autobauding devices, the serial rate will then be fixed  
at the rate of the command given. The delay before displaying log information can be  
set from 10ms to 2.55 seconds. When there is a great deal of activity in the TA it is  
probably best to set for a higher delay, but generally S105=1 (10ms of delay) is good  
at a serial rate of 115200. If there is too much activity, then some log information will  
be thrown away until the activity allows logging to continue. If DTR is negated  
(judged by the setting of &Dn), then log information will also be thrown away. The  
number of log information buffers that are thrown away are kept track of by  
wNumTracesDenied, which can be viewed by giving the command ATS95?<CR>.  
wNumTracesDenied is reset to 0 upon power-up and whenever S105 is set to a non-  
zero value. If Real-Time Decoding is enabled and the ports to which Real-Time  
Logging and Real-Time Decoding are enabled match (I.E. giving both commands  
S104=1 and S105=1 to port 1), then the real-time logging information and the real-  
time decoding information will be merged in sequence according to the time-stamp.  
By default Real-Time Logging is disabled.  
D.5 Test Commands  
Table D-6. Test Command Summary  
AT Command  
>LBn  
Unm  
Function  
Loop-back Control  
B-channel Loop-back  
Command: >LBn  
Function:  
Unit:  
Loop-back Control  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=0—no loop-back,  
n=1—loop-back B-channel data, but do not pass data to DTE,  
n=2—loop-back B-channel data, but also pass data to DTE,  
n=16—loop-back DTE data, but do not pass to B-channel,  
n=32—loop-back DTE data and pass to B-channel if available  
>LB0 (no loop-back)  
Default:  
Description: >LBn is a test command that can aid in testing various data protocols, performance,  
and integrity of the data by using an external tester to send data via the B-channel or  
DTE, loop the data back, and the external tester can keep track of the integrity and  
performance of various data protocols. When performing B-channel loop-back (n=1,  
n=2), then DTE loop-back (n=16, n=32) is not available. When performing DTE loop-  
back (n=16, n=32), then B-channel loop-back (n=1, n=2) is not available. To break  
out of DTE loop-back, use the escape sequence followed by AT<CR> (such as  
+++AT<CR>).  
RF300E/RF310E  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Command: Unm  
Function:  
Unit:  
B-channel Loop-back  
Decimal ASCII code  
Values:  
n=1—Loop-back on B1 only,  
n=2—Loop-back on B2 only,  
n=3—loop-back on both B-channels  
m=0—disable loop-back,  
m=1—enable loop-back  
U30 (no loop-back)  
Default:  
Description: >LBn is a test command that is used mainly for conformance testing. Unm puts  
specific B-channels in loop-back within the ISDN transceiver as opposed to the  
processor dealing with loop-back as is the case for the >LBn command. For  
example, ATU31<CR> sets the ISDN transceiver to loop back both B-channel 1 and  
B-channel 2 data. ATU30<CR> disables loop-back on both B-channels.  
D.6 Factory Profiles  
Profile 0 (&F0) Modem-Like Asynchronous Operation  
AT Command  
&C1  
Description  
DCD functions normally  
$D0  
&D1  
Disable persistent DTR dialing  
Hang up when DTR drops  
E1  
&E4  
&E6  
&E13  
#X0  
Enable command mode echo  
Enable hardware flow control  
Discard XON/XOFF characters  
Enable pacing  
Disable Sending Multiple Xoff Characters  
Enable +++ escape method  
%E1  
%E4  
&R1  
No OK response to +++ or <BREAK> escape  
CTS always high  
&RF1  
S0=1  
S2=43  
S3=13  
S4=10  
S5=8  
S7=45  
S10=20  
S25=5  
S32=20  
S34=2  
S50=0  
S52=1  
S53=2048  
&S1  
CTS is independent of RTS  
Answer after 1 ring  
Set escape character to + (ASCII 43)  
Set carriage return character to CR (ASCII 13)  
Set line feed character to LF (ASCII 10)  
Set backspace character to BS (ASCII 8)  
Wait 45 seconds for connection before aborting  
Set DCD drop time to 700 ms  
Set DTR detect time to 500 ms  
Set escape sequence guard time to 2 seconds  
Set maximum escape sequence character length  
Caller Line ID disabled  
Auto-Protocol Detection Enabled  
Maximum X.75 Buffer Size (2048 bytes)  
DSR follows DCD  
V1  
Select verbose messages  
!Z=x  
The data protocol is not modified  
Profile 1 (&F1)—V.120 Asynchronous Operation  
AT Command  
&C1  
Description  
DCD functions normally  
$D0  
&D1  
E1  
&E4  
&E6  
&E13  
#X0  
Disable persistent DTR dialing  
Hang up when DTR drops  
Enable command mode echo  
Enable hardware flow control  
Discard XON/XOFF characters  
Enable pacing  
Disable Sending Multiple Xoff Characters  
158  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
%E1  
Enable +++ escape method  
%E4  
&R1  
No OK response to +++ or <BREAK> escape  
CTS always high  
&RF1  
S0=1  
CTS is independent of RTS  
Answer after 1 ring  
S2=43  
S3=13  
S4=10  
S5=8  
Set escape character to + (ASCII 43)  
Set carriage return character to CR (ASCII 13)  
Set line feed character to LF (ASCII 10)  
Set backspace character to BS (ASCII 8)  
Wait 45 seconds for connection before aborting  
Set DCD drop time to 700 ms  
S7=45  
S10=20  
S25=5  
S32=20  
S34=2  
S50=0  
S52=1  
S53=2048  
S75=0  
&S1  
Set DTR detect time to 500 ms  
Set escape sequence guard time to 2 seconds  
Set maximum escape sequence character length  
Caller Line ID disabled  
Auto-Protocol Detection Enabled  
Maximum X.75 Buffer Size (2048 bytes)  
Maximum V.110 Buffer Size (256 bytes)  
DSR follows DCD  
V1  
Select verbose messages  
!Z=5  
Enable V.120 data protocol  
Profile 2 (&F2)—X.75 Asynchronous Operation  
AT Command  
&C1  
Description  
DCD functions normally  
$D0  
&D1  
Disable persistent DTR dialing  
Hang up when DTR drops  
E1  
&E4  
&E6  
&E13  
#X0  
Enable command mode echo  
Enable hardware flow control  
Discard XON/XOFF characters  
Enable pacing  
Disable Sending Multiple Xoff Characters  
Enable +++ escape method  
%E1  
%E4  
&R1  
No OK response to +++ or <BREAK> escape  
CTS always high  
&RF1  
S0=1  
S2=43  
S3=13  
S4=10  
S5=8  
S7=45  
S10=20  
S25=5  
S32=20  
S34=2  
S50=0  
S52=1  
S53=2048  
&S1  
CTS is independent of RTS  
Answer after 1 ring  
Set escape character to + (ASCII 43)  
Set carriage return character to CR (ASCII 13)  
Set line feed character to LF (ASCII 10)  
Set backspace character to BS (ASCII 8)  
Wait 45 seconds for connection before aborting  
Set DCD drop time to 700 ms  
Set DTR detect time to 500 ms  
Set escape sequence guard time to 2 seconds  
Set maximum escape sequence character length  
Caller Line ID disabled  
Auto-Protocol Detection Enabled  
Maximum X.75 Buffer Size (2048 bytes)  
DSR follows DCD  
V1  
Select verbose messages  
!Z=12  
Enable X.75 data protocol  
RF300E/RF310E  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Profile 3 (&F3)—PPP Asynchronous Operation  
AT Command  
&C1  
Description  
DCD functions normally  
$D0  
&D1  
Disable persistent DTR dialing  
Hang up when DTR drops  
E1  
&E4  
&E6  
&E13  
#X0  
Enable command mode echo  
Enable hardware flow control  
Discard XON/XOFF characters  
Enable pacing  
Disable Sending Multiple Xoff Characters  
Enable +++ escape method  
%E1  
%E4  
&R1  
No OK response to +++ or <BREAK> escape  
CTS always high  
&RF1  
S0=1  
S2=43  
S3=13  
S4=10  
S5=8  
S7=45  
S10=20  
S25=5  
S32=20  
S34=2  
S50=0  
S52=1  
S53=2048  
&S1  
CTS is independent of RTS  
Answer after 1 ring  
Set escape character to + (ASCII 43)  
Set carriage return character to CR (ASCII 13)  
Set line feed character to LF (ASCII 10)  
Set backspace character to BS (ASCII 8)  
Wait 45 seconds for connection before aborting  
Set DCD drop time to 700 ms  
Set DTR detect time to 500 ms  
Set escape sequence guard time to 2 seconds  
Set maximum escape sequence character length  
Caller Line ID disabled  
Auto-Protocol Detection Enabled  
Maximum X.75 Buffer Size (2048 bytes)  
DSR follows DCD  
V1  
Select verbose messages  
!Z=9  
Enable PPP data protocol  
160  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D - AT Command Summary  
Profile 4 (&F4)—HDLC Asynchronous Operation  
AT Command  
&C1  
$D0  
&D1  
E1  
&E4  
&E6  
&E13  
#X0  
%E1  
Description  
DCD functions normally  
Disable persistent DTR dialing  
Hang up when DTR drops  
Enable command mode echo  
Enable hardware flow control  
Discard XON/XOFF characters  
Enable pacing  
Disable Sending Multiple Xoff Characters  
Enable +++ escape method  
%E4  
&R1  
No OK response to +++ or <BREAK> escape  
CTS always high  
&RF1  
S0=1  
S2=43  
S3=13  
S4=10  
S5=8  
S7=45  
S10=20  
S25=5  
S32=20  
S34=2  
S50=0  
S52=0  
S53=2048  
&S1  
CTS is independent of RTS  
Answer after 1 ring  
Set escape character to + (ASCII 43)  
Set carriage return character to CR (ASCII 13)  
Set line feed character to LF (ASCII 10)  
Set backspace character to BS (ASCII 8)  
Wait 45 seconds for connection before aborting  
Set DCD drop time to 700 ms  
Set DTR detect time to 500 ms  
Set escape sequence guard time to 2 seconds  
Set maximum escape sequence character length  
Caller Line ID disabled  
Auto-Protocol Detection Disabled  
Maximum X.75 Buffer Size (2048 bytes)  
DSR follows DCD  
V1  
Select verbose messages  
!Z=7  
Enable HDLC data protocol  
RF300E/RF310E  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Appendix E - TCP/IP  
TCP/IP  
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) is a protocol suite and related applications  
developed for the U.S. Department of Defense in the 1970s and 1980s specifically to permit different types of  
computers to communicate and exchange information with one another. TCP/IP is currently mandated as an  
official U.S. Department of Defense protocol and is also widely used in the UNIX community.  
Before you install TCP/IP on your network, you need to establish your Internet addressing strategy. First,  
choose a domain name for your company. A domain name is the unique Internet name, usually the name of your  
business, that identifies your company. For example, Multi-Tech’s domain name is multitech.com (where .com  
indicates this is a commercial organization; .edu denotes educational organizations, .gov denotes  
government organizations). Next, determine how many IP addresses you’ll need. This depends on  
how many individual network segments you have, and how many systems on each segment need to  
be connected to the Internet. You’ll need an IP address for each network interface on each computer  
and hardware device.  
IP addresses are 32 bits long and come in two types: network and host. Network addresses come in  
five classes: A, B, C, D, and E. Each class of network address is allocated a certain number of host  
addresses. For example, a class B network can have a maximum of 65,534 hosts, while a class C  
network can have only 254. The class A and B addresses have been exhausted, and the class D and  
E addresses are reserved for special use. Consequently, companies now seeking an Internet  
connection are limited to class C addresses.  
Early IP implementations ran on hosts commonly interconnected by Ethernet local area networks  
(LAN). Every transmission on the LAN contains the local network, or medium access control (MAC),  
address of the source and destination nodes. The MAC address is 48-bits in length and is non-  
hierarchical; MAC addresses are never the same as IP addresses.  
When a host needs to send a datagram to another host on the same network, the sending application  
must know both the IP and MAC addresses of the intended receiver. Unfortunately, the IP process  
may not know the MAC address of the receiver. The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), described  
in RFC 826 (located at ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc826.txt) provides a mechanism for a host to  
determine a receiver’s MAC address from the IP address. In the process, the host sends an ARP  
packet in a frame containing the MAC broadcast address; and then the ARP request advertises the  
destination IP address and asks for the associated MAC address. The station on the LAN that  
recognizes its own IP address will send an ARP response with its own MAC address. An ARP  
message is carried directly in an IP datagram.  
Other address resolution procedures have also been defined, including those which allow a diskless  
processor to determine its IP address from its MAC address (Reverse ARP, or RARP), provides a  
mapping between an IP address and a frame relay virtual circuit identifier (Inverse ARP, or InARP),  
and provides a mapping between an IP address and ATM virtual path/channel identifiers (ATMARP).  
The TCP/IP protocol suite comprises two protocols that correspond roughly to the OSI Transport and  
Session Layers; these protocols are called the Transmission Control Protocol and the User Datagram  
Protocol (UDP). Individual applications are referred to by a port identifier in TCP/UDP messages. The  
port identifier and IP address together form a “socket”. Well-known port numbers on the server side  
of a connection include 20 (FTP data transfer), 21 (FTP control), 23 (Telnet), 25 (SMTP), 43 (whois),  
70 (Gopher), 79 (finger), and 80 (HTTP).  
TCP, described in RFC 793 ( ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc793.txt) provides a virtual circuit (connection-  
oriented) communication service across the network. TCP includes rules for formatting messages,  
establishing and terminating virtual circuits, sequencing, flow control, and error correction. Most of  
the applications in the TCP/IP suite operate over the “reliable” transport service provided by TCP.  
UDP, described in RFC 768 (ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc768.txt) provides an end-to-end datagram  
(connectionless) service. Some applications, such as those that involve a simple query and  
162  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E - TCP/IP  
response, are better suited to the datagram service of UDP because there is no time lost to virtual  
circuit establishment and termination. UDP’s primary function is to add a port number to the IP  
address to provide a socket for the application.  
The Application Layer protocols are examples of common TCP/IP applications and utilities, which  
include:  
•
Telnet (Telecommunication Network): a virtual terminal protocol allowing a user logged on to  
one TCP/IP host to access other hosts on the network, described in RFC 854 ( ftp://  
ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc854.txt).  
•
•
•
FTP: the File Transfer Protocol allows a user to transfer files between local and remote host  
computers per IETF RFC 959 ( ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc959.txt).  
Archie: a utility that allows a user to search all registered anonymous FTP sites for files on a  
specified topic.  
Gopher: a tool that allows users to search through data repositories using a menu-driven,  
hierarchical interface, with links to other sites, per RFC 1436 ( ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/  
rfc1436.txt).  
•
•
SMTP: the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the standard protocol for the exchange of  
electronic mail over the Internet, per IETF RFC 821 ( ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc821.txt).  
HTTP: the Hypertext Transfer Protocol is the basis for exchange of information over the  
World Wide Web (WWW). Various versions of HTTP are in use over the Internet, with HTTP  
version 1.0 (per RFC 1945) ( ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc1945.txt) being the most current.  
•
HTML: WWW pages are written in the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), an ASCII-based,  
platform-independent formatting language, per IETF RFC 1866 ( ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/  
rfc1866.txt).  
•
•
Finger: used to determine the status of other hosts and/or users, per IETF RFC 1288 ( ftp://  
ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc1288.txt).  
POP: the Post Office Protocol defines a simple interface between a user’s mail reader  
software and an electronic mail server; the current version is POP3, described in IETF RFC  
1460 ( ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc1460.txt).  
•
•
DNS: the Domain Name System defines the structure of Internet names and their association  
with IP addresses, as well as the association of mail, name, and other servers with domains.  
SNMP: the Simple Network Management Protocol defines procedures and management  
information databases for managing TCP/IP-based network devices. SNMP, defined by RFC  
1157 ( ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc1157.txt) is widely deployed in local and wide area network.  
SNMP Version 2 (SNMPv2), per RFC 1441< ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc1441.txt) adds security  
mechanisms that are missing in SNMP, but is also more complex.  
•
•
•
Ping: a utility that allows a user at one system to determine the status of other hosts and the  
latency in getting a message to that host. Ping uses ICMP Echo messages.  
Whois/NICNAME: Utilities that search databases for information about Internet domain and  
domain contact information, per RFC 954 ( ftp://ds.internic.net/rfc/rfc954.txt).  
Traceroute: a tool that displays the route that packets will take when traveling to a remote  
host.  
RF300E/RF310E  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Internet Protocol (IP)  
IP is the Internet standard protocol that tracks Internetwork node addresses, routes outgoing  
messages and recognizes incoming messages, allowing a message to cross multiple networks on  
the way to its final destination. The IPv6 Control Protocol (IPV6CP) is responsible for configuring,  
enabling, and disabling the IPv6 protocol modules on both ends of the point-to-point link. IPV6CP  
uses the same packet exchange mechanism as the Link Control Protocol (LCP). IPV6CP packets are  
not exchanged until PPP has reached the Network-Layer Protocol phase. IPV6CP packets received  
before this phase is reached are silently discarded. (See also TCP/IP.)  
Before you install TCP/IP on your network, you need to establish your Internet addressing strategy.  
You first choose a domain name for your company. A domain name is the unique Internet name,  
usually the name of your business, that identifies your company. For example, Multi-Tech’s domain  
name is multitech.com (where .com indicates this is a commercial organization; .edu denotes  
educational organizations, .gov denotes government organizations, etc.). Next, you determine how  
many IP addresses you’ll need. This depends on how many individual network segments you have,  
and how many systems on each segment need to be connected to the Internet. You need an IP  
address for each network interface on each computer and hardware device.  
IP addresses are 32 bits long and come in two types: network and host. Network addresses come in  
five classes: A, B, C, D, and E. Each class of network address is allocated a certain number of host  
addresses. For example, a class B network can have a maximum of 65,534 hosts, while a class C  
network can have only 254. The class A and B addresses have been exhausted, and the class D and  
E addresses are reserved for special use. Consequently, companies now seeking an Internet  
connection are limited to class C addresses. The current demand for Internet connections will  
exhaust the current stock of 32-bit IP addresses. In response, Internet architects have proposed the  
next generation of IP addresses, IPng (IP Next Generation). It will feature 16-byte (128-bit)  
addressing, surpassing the capacities of 32-bit IP. Still in its design phase, IPng (also known as IPv6)  
is not expected to be widely deployed before the end of this century.  
An IP address can serve only a single physical network. Therefore, if your organization has multiple  
physical networks, you must make them appear as one to external users. This is done via  
“subnetting”, a complex procedure best left to ISPs and others experienced in IP addressing. Since  
IP addresses and domain names have no inherent connection, they are mapped together in  
databases stored on Domain Name Servers (DNS). If you decide to let an Internet Service Provider  
(ISP) administer your DNS server, the ISP can assist you with the domain name and IP address  
assignment necessary to configure your company’s site-specific system information. Domain names  
and IP addresses are granted by the InterNIC. To check the availability of a specific name or to obtain  
more information, call the InterNIC at (703)742-4777.  
164  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F - Modem AT Commands  
Appendix F - Modem AT Commands  
ISIHP modems are controlled by instructions called AT commands, so called because the attention  
characters, AT, precede each command or sequence of commands (known as a command string).  
You can send commands to the modem from your keyboard while in terminal mode, or you can use  
communications software to issue these commands automatically.  
The modem is in command mode when it is not dialing or online. When it is in command mode, you  
have access to a complete communications system that allows you to use several features, including  
the basic AT command set described in this chapter. Using the basic AT command set, you can enter  
phone numbers for automatic dialing, configure modem options, and monitor telephone activity. In  
addition, you can command your modem to perform advanced features such as error correction, data  
compression, speed conversion, and more.  
This chapter describes the modem’s operational modes and shows you how to use each modem AT  
commands. These commands and responses are compatible with all systems and with all data  
communications software using the AT command set.  
Modes of Operation  
The modem operates in two basic functional modes: command mode and online mode. (There is also  
an in-between state, wait-for-carrier, in which the modem is out of command mode but not yet online.)  
When you turn on the modem, it is in command mode and is ready to accept and respond to  
commands from your keyboard or software.  
The modem enters online mode after it dials, connects with another modem, and detects a valid  
carrier signal. If it does not detect a carrier signal within the time frame controlled by the S-register  
S7, the modem abandons the call and reenters command mode.  
You can make the modem enter online mode without dialing by entering AT and then D (dial) or A  
(force answer mode). The modem exits online mode if the carrier signal is lost or intentionally  
dropped. When this happens, the modem hangs up and reenters command mode. By sending certain  
escape characters to the modem while online, you can make it enter command mode without losing  
the carrier signal. While waiting to establish the carrier, you can type any character from the keyboard  
to make the modem to go back to the command mode.  
Command Structure  
You can control a wide variety of modem operations and options when the modem is in command  
mode. AT commands tell the modem to dial a number, to answer a call, to operate at a certain speed,  
to use a certain compression technique, and many other functions. AT commands consist of one or  
two letters, which may be preceded by an ampersand (&), a percent character (%), or a slash  
character (/). The Q command, for example, determines whether the modem returns result codes,  
while the &Q command selects the asynchronous communications mode.  
A parameter after a command (0, 1, 2, etc.) tells the modem which option to use. If you do not specify  
a parameter, the modem assumes the 0 (zero) option. E, for example, is the same as E0. You can  
issue several commands on a single line (a command string) as long as the line does not exceed 40  
characters.  
Note: Each character in a command counts toward the 40 character command line maximum.  
Example: Q1 is a single command, but it counts as two characters in the command line.  
Each command has a valid range of parameters. For example, &S can have only 0 or 1 as a  
parameter. Valid commands always generate an OK result code, and a few generate an additional  
response such as a list of parameters. An invalid command such as &S3, which has a parameter  
outside the valid range, generates an ERROR result code. Most commands have a default parameter  
that is enabled when the modem is turned on or reset with the ATZ or AT&F command. Factory  
defaults are stored in read-only memory (ROM) and cannot be changed. User-defined defaults can  
be stored in nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM) and can be changed or deleted at will.  
RF300E/RF310E  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Command Editing  
Always begin a command with the letters AT. Enter the entire command string in upper or lower case,  
but do not mix cases within the command string. The AT command is not executed until you press  
ENTER. Use the BACKSPACE key to erase the previous command character. It will not erase the AT  
characters once they are typed. If your keyboard has no BACKSPACE key, use CTRL+H. (You can  
change the character recognized by the modem as BACKSPACE to any other ASCII character by  
changing register S5.)  
Press CTRL+X to cancel an entire command that has been typed but not yet executed. This also  
clears the command buffer. The effect is the same as backspacing the command, only quicker.  
The modem stores characters entered in a command in its command buffer until they are executed  
by pressing ENTER. The command buffer’s capacity is 40 characters. The attention characters (AT)  
do not count toward the 40-character command line maximum. You may use spaces for increased  
readability when typing a command. Spaces are not stored in the command buffer, and they do not  
count towards the 40-character command line maximum. Special characters, such as hyphens and  
parentheses, are not allowed.  
If you exceed the 40-character limit or type invalid characters, the command buffer is automatically  
erased and an ERROR message appears. Retype the command within the 40-character limit, using  
only the allowed characters.  
The commands in this chapter are organized by function. Abbreviated commands are listed on the  
next page by function along with a short description and page numbers that refer to a more detailed  
description, immediately following this list.  
Topic  
Command  
Description  
Dialing Action, p. 127  
D
Dial  
H
On-hook/off-hook  
Dial Modifiers, p. 128  
L, P, T, W  
Command accepted, but has no function  
Command accepted, but has no function  
Command accepted, but has no function  
Command accepted, but has no function  
,
;
! $ @ ^  
Phone Number Memory, p. 128  
&Z  
DS  
&W  
&F  
Z
Store a phone number  
Dial a stored number  
Configuration Storage & Recall, p. 129  
Store configuration  
Load factory default configuration  
Reset modem  
&Y  
E
Select stored configuration on power-up  
Echo command mode characters  
Result codes: enable/ disable  
Result codes: verbose/terse  
Protocol result code  
Modem Responses (Result Codes),  
p. 130  
Q
V
\V  
X
Result codes and call progress  
&Q  
B
Select asynchronous communications mode  
Answer tone  
Online Connection, p. 133  
C
Carrier control  
RF300E/RF310E  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F - Modem AT Commands  
F
Echo online data characters  
Guard tones  
&G  
-C  
Data calling tone  
N
Modulation handshake  
Disable inactivity timer  
Long space disconnect  
Carrier Detect control  
Data Terminal Ready control  
Data Set Ready control  
Non-error correction mode  
Auto-reliable mode  
\T  
Y
RS-232 Interface Controls, p. 135  
&C  
&D  
&S  
Error Correction & Data  
\N0 or &Q6  
Compression, p. 136  
\N3  
\N2  
Reliable mode  
%C0  
Data compression disabled  
Data compression enabled  
Repeat last command  
Information request  
%C1  
Immediate Action, p. 138  
A/  
I
&B  
V.32 auto retrain  
&V  
View current configuration  
Asynchronous mode  
Flow control disabled  
Hardware flow control  
XON/XOFF flow control  
XON/XOFF no pass-through  
Auxiliary relay control  
Enable data buffer control  
Modem port flow control  
Set break control  
Flow Control, p. 139  
&M0  
&K0 or \Q0  
&K3 or \Q3  
&K4 or \Q1  
\X0  
&J  
\J  
\G  
\K  
Escape Sequences, p. 141  
+++AT<cr>  
Default in-band escape sequence  
Force answer mode  
A
O
Go back online  
RF300E/RF310E  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Dialing Commands  
Use dialing commands to dial and hang up.  
Ds  
Dial  
s = phone number  
Default: none  
Causes the modem to dial the telephone number immediately following it. For example, if you type  
ATD5551212<cr>, the modem dials the number 555-1212.  
Hn  
On-Hook/Off-Hook  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: 0  
Makes the modem hang up (go on-hook) or simulate the action of picking up a telephone handset (go  
off-hook).  
H0  
(or H) hangs up the modem  
H1 brings the line off-hook, just as if you had picked up the telephone handset.  
It is not necessary to use the H1 command to bring the line off-hook when using the D command.  
The modem automatically goes off-hook when you press ENTER at the end of the dial command.  
Dial Modifier Commands  
ISIHx modems rely on the terminal adapters on the card for dialing. For backwards compatibility, the  
following dial modifier commands can be included in the dial string. They are accepted by the  
modem, but ignore the actual function. These commands are:  
L
Redial Last Number  
P, T  
W
,
Pulse or Tone Dialing  
Wait for New Dial Tone  
Dialing Pause  
;
Return to Command Mode After Dialing  
Flash On-Hook  
!
$
Detect Call Card Tone  
Quiet Answer  
@
^
Disable Data Calling Tone Transmission  
Phone Number Memory Commands  
ISIHx modems can store up to 10 telephone numbers in nonvolatile memory. You can store the  
numbers with the &Z command and dial them with the ATDS command.  
&Zn=s  
Store a Phone Number  
s = phone number  
n= 0, 1, 2 or 3  
Default: none  
You can store a telephone number string in the modem’s phone number memory. You can store four  
of these strings using the &Zn=s command. The memory locations are labeled N0 through N3. For  
example, the telephone number 1-612-555-1212 is stored at memory location N2 by typing  
&Z2=16125551212 and pressing ENTER.  
DSn  
Dial a Stored Number  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3  
Default: none  
You can automatically dial a telephone number that is stored in the modem’s number memory by  
typing ATDSn, where n = 0 through 3. For example, you can dial a number stored at N2 by typing  
ATDS2 in terminal mode and pressing ENTER.  
RF300E/RF310E  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F - Modem AT Commands  
Configuration Storage and Recall Commands  
The ISIHx stores parameters in two places. It stores factory default parameters in read-only memory  
(ROM), and customized parameters in nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM). You cannot  
change the default parameters in ROM, but you can change parameters in temporary memory and  
then store them in NVRAM as custom settings. You can then recall the custom settings as if they  
were factory default settings.  
&Wn Store Configuration  
n = 0  
Default: &W0  
The &W command stores current AT commands and S-register values in nonvolatile memory, so you  
won’t lose your custom settings when you turn off the modem or reset it.  
&W0 (or &W) stores all current AT command and S-register values in nonvolatile random access  
memory (NVRAM) and configures the modem so it reads your custom settings in NVRAM when the  
modem is turned on or when it is reset with the Z command. The &F reset command continues to  
read the factory default settings in ROM.  
&Fn  
Load Default Configuration  
n = 0  
Default: &F0  
ISIHx modems store factory default AT command settings and S-register values in read-only  
memory (ROM); they store your custom AT command and S-register values in nonvolatile random  
access memory (NVRAM).  
The &F0 (or &F) command resets modem to the factory default values stored in ROM.  
Zn  
Reset Modem  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: none  
The Z command resets the modem to the configuration last saved by the &W command. The default  
values come from the customized configuration in NVRAM.  
Z1 is the same as Z0, and functions identically.  
&Yn  
Select Stored Configuration for Hard Reset  
n = 0  
Default: 0  
This command is included for compatibility with applications that issue the &Y0 command. Modem  
functions are not changed.  
&Y0 selects the profile stored at location 0 on power-up.  
Modem Response (Result Code) Commands  
ISIHx modems can give responses to commands. The most common is OK, but the modems also  
can alert you or your software to dial tones, busy signals, connection speeds, and whether the  
connection is made with error correction or compression enabled. These responses are called result  
codes; they can be terse (numbers) or verbose (text).  
En  
Echo Command Mode Characters  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: E1  
Normally, when you type commands on the keyboard, the modem echoes the characters back to the  
computer or terminal, which displays them on the monitor. Use the E command to turn this feature off  
and on.  
E0 disables the echo.  
RF300E/RF310E  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
E1 enables the echo.  
Qn  
Result Codes Enable/Disable  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: Q0  
Use the Q command to enable or disable result codes for applications such as computer-controlled  
auto dialing.  
Q0 (or Q) enables result codes.  
Q1 disables result codes for applications such as computer-controlled auto-dialing.  
Vn  
Result Codes (Verbose/Terse)  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: V1  
The V command controls whether the modem’s result codes display as text (verbose) or numeric  
(terse) messages. For example, if no carrier signal is detected after dialing, the result can display  
either as NO CARRIER or as the number 3.  
V0 (or V) displays the modem’s result codes as a number.  
V1 displays result codes as text.  
V2, an additional command given anytime after ATV1 is entered, displays the connect message of  
both the local modem and the remote modem.  
Xn  
Result Codes and Call Progress Selection  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7  
Default: X4  
Selects which result codes the modem provides in command mode and determines whether the  
modem uses smart dialing or blind dialing. When it smart dials, the modem listens for dial tones and  
busy signals and responds to them. When it blind dials, the modem ignores the signals and relies on  
timing instead.  
X0 causes the modem to blind dial. Instead of looking for a dial tone, it pauses for the time set in  
register S6 and then dials regardless. Once a connection is made, it sends the basic code  
CONNECT to the terminal. It ignores any busy signals.  
X1 causes the modem to blind dial. In addition to the basic CONNECT code, it provides extended  
codes consisting of the word CONNECT and the speed of the connection (CONNECT 14400 or  
CONNECT 28800, for example). In this mode, the modem does not recognize or respond to dial  
tones or busy signals.  
X2 causes the modem to wait for a dial tone before dialing. If it does not detect a dial tone within the  
time set by S6, the modem sends a NO DIALTONE result code to the terminal. In this mode, the  
modem provides extended result codes but does not respond to busy signals.  
X3 causes the modem to blind dial and to look for a busy signal. If it detects one, it sends a BUSY  
result code to the terminal. In this mode, the modem provides extended result codes, but it does not  
respond to dial tones.  
X4 causes the modem to look for a dial tone and a busy signal and respond with NO DIALTONE or  
BUSY, as appropriate. It also provides extended result codes. It is the most useful setting for most  
data communication programs and is the default setting.  
X5 causes the modem to look for a dial tone and a busy signal and respond with NO DIALTONE or  
BUSY, as appropriate. It also provides extended result codes. It is the most useful setting for most  
data communication programs and is the default setting.  
X6 causes the modem to look for a dial tone and a busy signal and respond with NO DIALTONE or  
BUSY, as appropriate. It also provides extended result codes. It is the most useful setting for most  
data communication programs and is the default setting.  
RF300E/RF310E  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F - Modem AT Commands  
X7 causes the modem to wait for a dial tone before dialing. If it doesn’t detect a dial tone within the  
time set by S6, the modem sends only the basic result code to the terminal (ERROR, NO CARRIER,  
or CONNECT, for example). In this mode, the modem does not respond to busy signals.  
&Qn Asynchronous Communications Mode  
n = 0, 5, or 6  
Default: &Q5  
Allows you to select the type of asynchronous communications mode for your modem.  
Note: These commands are the same as several of the \Nn commands, described later in this  
chapter.  
&Q0 selects asynchronous mode with data buffering. This is the same as \N0, nonerror correction  
mode with data buffering.  
&Q5 selects error control with data buffering. This is the same as \N3, V.42/MNP auto-reliable mode.  
&Q6 selects asynchronous mode with data buffering. This is the same as \N0, non-error correction  
mode with data buffering.  
Online Connection Commands  
The following commands control the conditions of the online connection.  
Bn Answer Tone  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 15, or 16  
Default: B1 and B16  
Selects the frequency the modem uses for its answer tone. (The answer tone is the tone transmitted  
by the receiving modem to the calling modem, thus initiating the handshake between the two  
modems.) At higher speeds (2400 bps and above) there is no conflict because all protocols use the  
Bell frequency of 2225 Hz. Lower speeds require different frequencies.  
B0 selects ITU-T V.22 mode when the modem is at 1200 bps.  
B1 selects Bell 212A when the modem is at 1200 bps. This is a default.  
B15 selects V.21 when the modem is at 300 bps.  
B16 selects Bell 103J when the modem is at 300 bps. This is a default.  
Cn  
-Cn  
Dummy Command  
Data Calling Tone  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: -C0  
The data calling tone is a tone of a certain frequency and cadence, as specified in the V.25  
standards, which identifies whether it is remote data, fax, or voice. The frequency is 1300 Hz, with a  
cadence of .5 s on and 2 s off.  
-C0 disables the V.25 data calling tone.  
-C1 enables the V.25 data calling tone.  
F
Dummy command  
&Gn Guard Tones  
n = 0, 1, or 2  
Default: &G0 (models outside U.K.) or &G2 (U.K. models only)  
Controls the presence or absence of guard tones from the transmitter when in answer mode at either  
1200 or 2400 bps. Guard tones are used in Europe and other areas to allow the modem to function in  
the telephone systems. Guard tones are not used in the United States. U.K. models are locked at  
&G2 (1800 Hz guard tone).  
&G0 disables ITU-T guard tones.  
&G1 enables ITU-T 550 Hz guard tone.  
&G2 enables ITU-T 1800 Hz guard tone.  
RF300E/RF310E  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Nn Modulation Handshake  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: N1  
Controls whether the local modem performs a negotiated handshake with the remote modem at  
connection time when the communication speed of the two modems is different.  
N0 enables handshaking only at the communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB  
command.  
N1 always begins the handshake only at the communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB  
command, but allows fallback to a lower speed as the handshake proceeds. This is the default.  
\Tn  
Inactivity Timer  
n = 0  
Default: \T0  
The inactivity timer specifies the length of time, in minutes, that the modem waits before  
disconnecting when no data is sent or received. This timer is specified in register S30. The \T0  
command disables the inactivity timer.  
Yn  
Long Space Disconnect  
n = 0, 1  
Default: Y0  
When two modems are connected in reliable mode, a link disconnect request packet is sent to  
request a disconnect. In non-error correction mode, there is no polite way to request a disconnect. As  
a result, some garbage may be received when a hang-up command is issued.  
Y0 disables the modem’s use of the break signal.  
Y1 enables long space disconnect.  
RS-232 Interface Commands  
These commands define how the ISIHP-2S/2U modems use and respond to standard  
RS-232 signals.  
&Cn  
Carrier Detect Control  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: &C1  
Allows you to control the Carrier Detect (CD) signal on the RS-232/V.24 interface. This is a signal  
from the modem to your computer indicating that the carrier signal is being received from a remote  
modem. Normally, CD goes high (turns on) when the modem detects a carrier on the  
communications link and drops (turns off) when it loses the carrier. By using &C, you can force the  
signal to stay high, or to drop momentarily when the remote modem disconnects. This option is useful  
with some CBX phone systems and mainframe front ends, which require CD to act in this manner.)  
&C0 ignores the state of the carrier from the remote modem. CD is forced high.  
&C1 allows CD to act normally—to go high when the modem detects a carrier, and to drop when it  
loses the carrier.  
&Dn  
Data Terminal Ready Control  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3  
Default: &D2  
The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal on pin 20 of the RS-232/V.24 interface must be high, or on, in  
order for the modem to operate. A high DTR signal tells the modem that the computer it is connected  
to is ready to communicate through the modem.  
The DTR signal can also be used to cause the modem to reset to its default parameters, as if you  
had given the modem an ATZ command.  
&D0 (or &D) causes the modem to ignore the DTR signal and treat it as always on.  
RF300E/RF310E  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F - Modem AT Commands  
&D1 causes the modem, if in online data mode, to enter command mode, issue an OK and remain  
connected when the DTR drops.  
&D2 causes the modem to hang up when DTR drops while the modem is in online data mode.  
&D3 causes the modem to reset when DTR drops . It will also hang up if it is online.  
&Sn  
Data Set Ready Control  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: &S0  
Controls the state of the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal on the RS-232/V.24 interface. Normally, DSR  
follows CD. You can force the signal high or allow it to act normally.  
&S0 forces DSR high (on).  
&S1 allows DSR to act normally, that is, to follow CD.  
Error Correction and Data Compression Commands  
You can configure modems to any of three different V.42 modes of operation (with or without  
compression): non-error correction, auto-reliable, and reliable modes. You also can turn data  
compression on or off.  
\Nn  
Error Correction Modes  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7  
Default: \N3  
Select the modem’s error correction mode using the \N command.  
\N0 disables the modem’s V.42 error correction capabilities, and the modem functions as a non-error  
correction modem with data buffering. This is the same as &Q6, described earlier in this chapter.  
\N1 causes the modem to function in direct mode.  
\N2 enables reliable mode, in which the modem uses its V.42 error correction capabilities for all  
transmissions. In reliable mode, the modem must be connected to a modem with the V.42 MNP  
protocol.  
\N3 enables auto-reliable mode. During the handshaking procedures at the start of the online  
connection, the modem queries whether the other modem is using V.42 error correction. If the  
modem determines that the other modem is using V.42, it switches itself into reliable (V.42) mode and  
enables error correction. If it determines that the other modem is not using V.42, the modem remains  
in non-error correction mode. (This is the same as \N5 and \N7.)  
\N4 enables reliable mode, in which the modem uses its V.42 error correction capabilities for all  
transmissions. In reliable mode, the modem must be connected to a modem with a V.42 protocol  
(MNP or LAP-M).  
The V.42 standard includes MNP Class 3 and 4 and LAP-M error correction methods.  
\N5 enables auto-reliable mode. During the handshaking procedures at the start of the online  
connection, the modem queries whether the other modem is using V.42 error correction. If the  
modem determines that the other modem is using V.42, it switches itself into reliable (V.42) mode and  
enables error correction. If it determines that the other modem is not using V.42, the modem remains  
in non-error correction mode. (This is the same as \N3 and \N7).  
\N7 enables auto-reliable mode. During the handshaking procedures at the start of the online  
connection, the modem queries whether the other modem is using V.42 error correction. If the  
modem determines that the other modem is using V.42, it switches itself into reliable (V.42) mode and  
enables error correction. If it determines that the other modem is not using V.42, the modem remains  
in non-error correction mode. (This is the same as \N3 and \N5).  
RF300E/RF310E  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
%Cn Data Compression  
n = 0 or 1  
Default: %C1  
The %C command allows you to disable data compression. Data compression is normally enabled.  
%C0 disables V.42bis/MNP 5 data compression.  
%C1 enables V.42bis/MNP 5 data compression.  
Immediate Action Commands  
Use immediate action commands to obtain information about AT commands and current modem  
settings.  
A/  
Repeat Last Command  
Default: None  
Type A/ to repeat the previous command. Do not precede this command with AT or press ENTER to  
execute it.  
In  
Information Request  
n = 0  
Default: none  
This command displays specific product information about your modem.  
I0 or I returns the controller firmware version number. Use this command to identify your modem’s  
firmware level before calling Multi-Tech Technical Support. (Same as I3.)  
&Bn  
&V  
Dummy command  
View Current Configuration  
Default: none  
Use the &V command to display the active modem settings.  
Flow Control Commands  
Flow control refers to techniques used by data terminal equipment and the modem to pause and  
resume the flow of information between them. It prevents a device from accepting more data than it  
can handle. The modem implements flow control in both directions. When the modem halts the flow  
of data, it is called flow control. When the computer halts the flow, it is called pacing.  
&Kn  
Local Flow Control Selection  
n = 0, 3, or 4  
Default: &K3  
Allows you disable flow control and enable hardware or software flow control.  
&K0 completely disables data flow control initiated by the modem. (Same as \Q0.)  
&K3 enables modem’s use of Clear to Send (CTS) signal on the RS-232/V.24 interface to regulate  
data flow. When CTS drops, data flow is suspended until the signal goes high (on) again. This  
method of flow control works in conjunction with pacing (i.e., computer-initiated flow control), which  
uses the Request to Send (RTS) signal on the RS-232/V.24 interface. Hardware flow control cannot  
be enabled unless an active error correction protocol is selected. This is the factory default setting.  
(This is the same as \Q3.)  
&K4 enables XON/XOFF software flow control. XON/XOFF flow control is an in-band method of data  
flow regulation. In-band data regulation means that the XON (^Q) and XOFF (^S) characters are  
inserted into the stream of data rather than using separate control lines. When an XOFF character is  
detected, the data stream is suspended until an XON character is detected. If you issue the &K4  
command to the modem, it will respond to XON/XOFF pacing, and use XON/XOFF characters as its  
own method of flow control to the computer. (This is the same as \Q1.)  
RF300E/RF310E  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F - Modem AT Commands  
The drawback to using this method of pacing is that some files may contain these characters as part  
of the file data. If such a file is transferred using a modem with XON/XOFF flow control enabled, the  
file transfer could fail due to indefinite suspension.  
\Qn  
Local Flow Control Selection  
n = 0, 1, or 3  
Default: \Q3  
Allows you disable flow control and enable hardware or software flow control.  
\Q0 completely disables data flow control initiated by the modem. (This is the same as &K0.)  
\Q1 enables XON/XOFF software flow control. XON/XOFF flow control is an in-band method of data  
flow regulation. In-band data regulation means that the XON (^Q) and XOFF (^S) characters are  
inserted into the stream of data rather than using separate control lines. When an XOFF character is  
detected, the data stream is suspended until an XON character is detected. If you issue the &K4  
command to the modem, it will respond to XON/XOFF pacing, and use XON/XOFF characters as its  
own method of flow control to the computer. (This is the same as &K4.)  
The drawback to using this method of pacing is that some files may contain these characters as part  
of the file data. If such a file is transferred using a modem with XON/XOFF flow control enabled, the  
file transfer could fail due to indefinite suspension.  
\Q3 enables modem’s use of Clear to Send (CTS) signal on the RS-232/V.24 interface to regulate  
data flow. When CTS drops, data flow is suspended until the signal goes high (on) again. This  
method of flow control works in conjunction with pacing (i.e., computer-initiated flow control), which  
uses the Request to Send (RTS) signal on the RS-232/V.24 interface. Hardware flow control cannot  
be enabled unless an active error correction protocol is selected. This is the factory default setting.  
(This is the same as &K3.)  
\Xn  
XON/XOFF Pass-Through  
n = 0, 1  
Default: \X0  
When XON/XOFF pacing is active, the local modem has two options regarding the XON and XOFF  
characters. It can respond to and discard the characters from the computer, or it can respond to the  
characters and pass them through the data communications link to the remote modem, thereby  
pacing the remote modem as well.  
\X0 causes the modem to respond to and discard the XON and XOFF characters (default)  
\X1 causes the modem to respond to and pass on the XON and XOFF characters  
\Jn  
Data Buffer Control  
n = 0  
Default: \J0  
\J0 disables force line rate less than or equal to DTE rate  
\J1 enables force line rate less than or equal to DTE rate  
\Kn  
Set Break Control  
n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5  
Default: \K5  
Determines how the modem processes a break signal received from the local DTE during an online  
connection.  
\K5 causes the modem to send the break to the remote modem in sequence with transmitted data,  
non-destructive, non-expedited.  
RF300E/RF310E  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Escape Sequences  
Escape sequences are also known as escape codes. They are used to cause the modem to enter  
command mode from online mode without disconnecting the call.  
+++AT<cr>  
In-Band Escape Sequence  
If the modem is online with a remote modem, you can cause the modem to enter command mode  
without disconnecting the call by typing an escape code. The default escape code used by the  
modem is three plus signs (+++) followed by the letters AT, up to 10 command characters (most  
typically H, to hang up), and ENTER. The modem then escapes to command mode, executes the  
command (if any), and remains in command mode. For example, to hang up the modem at the end of  
a call, type +++ATH <cr>.  
A
Force Answer Mode  
You can use the A command to force the modem into answer mode. Type ATA when in command  
mode to immediately bring your modem off-hook, out of command mode, into online answer mode,  
and to cause it to transmit its carrier signal over the phone line. If no responding carrier tone is  
received by your modem within 45 seconds (or by the time you specified in register S7), your modem  
stops transmitting its tone, hangs up, and goes back into command mode.  
On  
Go Back Online  
n = 0, 1, or 3  
Default: none  
Use the O command to bring the modem out of command mode and back into online mode. The O  
command reverses the result of entering the escape code. The O command brings modem into the  
online mode (originate or answer) it was in prior to entering command mode.  
O0 causes the modem to exit command mode and return to online data mode.  
O1 causes the modem to issue a retrain before returning to online data mode.  
O3 causes the modem to issue a rate renegotiation before returning to online data mode.  
Modem S-Registers  
S-registers are small regions of memory where modem configuration information is stored. Whereas  
AT commands tell a modem what to do, S-registers tell the modem how to do it. Each S-register has  
a name that consists of the letter S and a number (S0, S1, S2, etc.), hence the term S-register. Use  
the Sr? command to read the value stored in an S-register and the Sr=n command to change it.  
S0  
Number of Rings Until Modem Answers  
Unit: 1 ring  
Range: 0–255  
Default: 0  
Defines number of rings the modem waits before answering an incoming call. Default value is zero,  
which effectively disables the auto-answer function. When auto-answer is disabled, the modem can  
only answer via the ATA command. Set the S0 register value to one to cause the modem to answer  
the call immediately after the first ring. Maximum number of rings that can be configured is 255.  
S1  
Ring Count  
Unit: 1 ring  
Range: 0–255  
Default: 0  
Counts number of rings that have occurred. It is a read type of register and is seldom used in typical  
operation. Each time an incoming ring signal is detected, S1 increases its value by one, up to a  
maximum of 255. If you set S1 to a value other than its default value of zero, or if the value is  
increasing with rings, this new value remains stored in S1 for eight seconds after the last ring is  
counted, after which the value reverts back to zero.  
RF300E/RF310E  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F - Modem AT Commands  
S2  
Escape Code Character  
Unit: Decimal  
Range: 0–255  
Default: 43 (+)  
Defines escape code character by its decimal ASCII code. Default character is the plus (+) sign  
(decimal 43). S2 can be set for any ASCII character. Setting an S2 value greater than 127 results in  
no escape character, resulting in no means of entering command mode from online mode without  
breaking the online connection unless you use the BREAK method.  
Note: If you change the S2 value, you must make corresponding changes in your data  
communications software.  
S3  
Return Character  
Unit: Decimal  
Range: 0–127  
Default: 13 (^M)  
Defines carriage return character by its decimal ASCII code. Default setting is the ^M character  
(decimal 13), the code for ENTER on most keyboards. Can be set for any ASCII character.  
Note: If you change the S3 value, you must make corresponding changes in your data  
communications software.  
S4  
Line Feed Character  
Unit: Decimal  
Range: 0–127  
Default: 10 (^J)  
Defines the line feed character by its decimal ASCII code. Default setting is ^J (decimal 10), the code  
for the line feed key on most keyboards that have such a key. Can be set for any ASCII character.  
S5  
Backspace Character  
Unit: Decimal  
Range: 0–127  
Default: 8 (^H)  
Defines backspace character by its decimal ASCII code. Default setting is the ^H character (decimal  
8), the code for BACKSPACE on most keyboards. Can be set for any ASCII character. Setting S2 to  
a value greater than 32 disables the backspace character.  
Note: If you change the S5 value, you must make corresponding changes in your data  
communications software.  
S6  
Wait Time for Dial Tone  
Unit: 1 second  
Range: 2–65 (North America), 4–255 (International), 4–7(U.K.)  
Default: 2 (North America), 4 (International and U.K.)  
Defines length of time the modem waits after ENTER is pressed before carrying out a dial command.  
Default setting is two seconds for North America, four seconds elsewhere.  
S7  
Time to Wait for Carrier  
Unit: 1 second  
Range: 1–255 (USA), 1–45 (Canada and International), 1–55 (UK)  
Default: 50 (North America and International) or 55 (U.K.)  
Determines amount of time the modem waits for a carrier signal before it disconnects. Default value  
is 50 seconds except the UK model, which defaults to 55 seconds. After dialing, the modem waits for  
a carrier signal for up to 50 or 55 seconds and if none is detected, terminates the call. Maximum S7  
value is 255 seconds for the US model, 45 seconds for Canadian and International models, and 55  
seconds for the UK model. S7 also determines the wait for silence time for the @ dial modifier.  
RF300E/RF310E  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
S8 Pause Time for Comma  
Unit: 1 second  
Range: 0–65 (North America), 4–255 (International), 4–7(UK)  
Default: 2 (North America), 4 (International and UK)  
Determines the length of pause caused by a comma character in a dialing command. Default setting  
is two seconds for North American model and four seconds for international and UK models. S8 can  
be set for up to 65 seconds. S8 also defines the length of time the modem waits before retrying a call  
after it detects a busy signal. Some computer systems need more than two seconds to reset. If this is  
the case, increase the value of S8.  
S10  
Carrier Loss Disconnect Delay Time  
Unit: 100 ms  
Range: 1–254  
Default: 20  
Defines the length of time, in milliseconds, that the modem waits after a loss of carrier signal before  
the it disconnects. The default setting is 2000 ms (20 units of 100 ms each). Maximum delay is 25400  
milliseconds, or 25.4 seconds (decimal 254).  
S11  
Tone Dialing Spacing and Duration  
Unit: 1 ms  
Range: 50 - 150 (US) or 80–255 (Canada, UK, International)  
Default: 95 (US) or 80 (Canada, UK, International)  
Sets the speed of tone dialing (spacing and tone duration times). The default value is 95 units for  
domestic models and 80 units for Canadian and International models, where each unit is one ms. In  
other words, for domestic modems, each tone is sustained for 95 ms followed by a 95 ms pause. The  
minimum S11 value allowed is 50 ms (50 units). The maximum S11 value is 150 ms (150 units).  
S28  
Enable / Disable V.34 Modulation  
Unit: decimal  
Range: 0, 1–255  
Default:1 (enabled)  
Enables or disables V.34 modulation. Setting S28 to zero (0) disables V.34 modulation. Any other  
setting (1-255) enables V.34 modulation.  
S35  
Data Calling Tone  
Unit: decimal  
Range: 0–1  
Default: 0 (disabled)  
Enables or disables the V.25 data calling tone, which allows remote data, fax and voice  
discrimination. Setting S35 to zero (0) disables V.25 data calling tone; setting S35 to 1 enables data  
calling tone. The default setting is 1.  
S37  
Maximum Dial Line Rate  
Unit: decimal  
Range: 0–19  
Default: 0  
Sets the maximum dial line rate. When set to zero (0), the maximum dial line rate is the same as the  
maximum modem speed. This is the most common setting and allows other modem functions to  
actually determine the line rate used for each connection. It is the default. Consider using S37 to set  
a maximum dial line rate if you need to artificially retain a lower modem speed.  
0 = maximum modem speed 11 = 14400 bps  
1 = reserved  
12 = 16800 bps  
13 = 19200 bps  
14 = 21600 bps  
2 = 1200/75 bps  
5 = 1200 bps  
RF300E/RF310E  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F - Modem AT Commands  
6 = 2400 bps  
7 = 4800 bps  
8 = 7200 bps  
9 = 9600 bps  
10 = 12000 bps  
15 = 24000 bps  
16 = 26400 bps  
17 = 28800 bps  
18 = 31200 bps  
19 = 33600 bps  
S42  
Enable / Disable Auto Rate  
Unit: decimal  
Range: 0-1  
Default: 1 (enabled)  
Enables and disables the 56K auto rate. Retrain and fallback are disabled in data mode. Set S42 to  
zero (0) to disable auto rate, or 1 (the default) to enable auto rate.  
S43  
Enable / Disable V.32bis Start-up Auto Mode  
Unit: decimal  
Range: 0-1  
Default: 1 (enabled)  
Used for testing and debugging only. Enables and disables V.32bis start-up auto mode operation. Set  
S43 to zero (0) to disable start-up auto mode, or 1 (the default) to enable start-up auto mode.  
S89  
Off-line Time  
Unit: 1 second  
Range: 0, 5-255  
Default: 0  
Sets the length of time, in seconds, a modem waits in the off-line command mode before it goes into  
standby mode. If S89 is set to 20 seconds, the modem waits 20 seconds in off-line command mode  
before going into standby mode. Setting S89 to zero (0) prevents the modem from ever entering  
standby mode.  
Setting S89 to any value between zero and five (1-4) effectively sets the value to five, because five  
seconds is the minimum possible wait time.  
S108 Line Code Control  
Unit: Decimal  
Range: 0, 1  
Default: 1  
Controls the line coding used by the modem.  
S108 = 0  
S108 = 1  
mu-law  
A-law (default)  
S109 PCM Mode Control  
Unit: Decimal  
Range: 0–2  
Default: 1  
Controls the PCM ( pulse code modulation) mode (V.90 or K56Flex). Determines which mode the  
modem will answer in for PCM connections.  
S109 = 0  
S109 = 1  
S109 = 2  
K56Flex support only  
Both V.90 and K56Flex supported  
V.90 support only  
RF300E/RF310E  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Reading and Assigning S-Register Values  
Use the S command to assign a value to an S-register and to read an it’s current value. To read an S-  
register value, in terminal mode, type S, the S-register number, and a question mark (?), and press  
ENTER. For example, to display the value of register S7, type ATS7? and press ENTER. The value  
appears as a three-digit decimal number (e.g., 045).  
To assign a new value to an S-register, type S, the S-register number, an equals sign (=), and a  
decimal number. Convert all ASCII characters to their decimal equivalents before entering. Valid S-  
register decimal values are shown for each register in the previous section. To make the change  
permanent, use the &W0 command.  
Examples of Assigning Values  
1. You want to have longer pauses caused by the comma in a dial command: five seconds instead  
of two. Type ATS8=5 to assign 5 as the value for register S8. The modem now pauses five  
seconds for every comma in a dial command.  
2. You want to configure your modem to answer incoming calls after the fourth ring instead of after  
the first ring. To configure register S0 with a value of 4, type ATS0=4 and press ENTER.  
3. You are calling long distance to another country code, and it is taking a long time to connect. The  
register S7 (time to wait for carrier) factory default setting of 50 seconds is insufficient; a time-out  
occurs and cancels the call before a connection is made. To change the S7 value to 75 seconds,  
type ATS7=75 and press ENTER . Now, after dialing, the modem allows 25 more seconds for a  
carrier signal before aborting the call. The additional 25 seconds should provide enough time for  
international calls.  
Examples of Reading Values  
1. To verify that you entered the value correctly in the preceding examples, type ATS8? and press  
ENTER in the first example, ATS0? in the second example, and ATS2? in the third example. You  
should receive the responses 005, 004, and 075, respectively.  
2. When configuring S-registers, it is a good practice to include the verification read command in the  
same command string as the configuration assignment command. In the three preceding  
examples, type ATS8=5S8?, ATS0=4S3?, and ATS7=75S7?, respectively.  
AT Commands that Affect S-Registers  
For maximum throughput, the ISIHP’s default configuration is for originating a call to another 33,600  
bps modem that supports error correction, data compression, and flow control. If the receiving  
modem is not compatible, the ISIHP can match any ITU-T or Bell standard modem (but not  
proprietary protocols).  
If you require a different configuration for your application—for example, if you want to use an ISIHP  
modem strictly as an auto answering device or for service that does not support error correction—  
you can change the command parameters and S-register values in active memory and save the new  
values with the &W command.  
The &W0 (or &W) command stores all current AT command and S-register values into nonvolatile  
random access memory (NVRAM) and configures the modem so that it reads your custom settings in  
NVRAM when the modem is turned on or when it is reset with the Z command. (The &F reset  
command will continue to read the factory default settings in read-only memory [ROM].) For  
convenience, you can include the &W command in the same command string that sets the new  
values in active memory as in the following example: AT\N2&C1S0=10&W0<cr>  
RF300E/RF310E  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix F - Modem AT Commands  
Modem Result Codes  
Terse  
Verbose  
Definition  
0
OK  
Command executed without error; ready for next command.  
Modem has detected carrier and gone online.  
Modem has detected ring caused by incoming call.  
No carrier signal has been detected within the allowed time.  
Error in command line (too many, or invalid characters).  
Modem detected carrier at 1200 bps and gone online.  
No dial tone detected.  
1
CONNECT  
2
RING  
3
NO CARRIER  
ERROR  
4
5
CONNECT 1200  
NO DIALTONE  
BUSY  
6
7
Busy signal detected.  
8
NO ANSWER  
CONNECT 2400  
CONNECT 4800  
CONNECT 9600  
CONNECT 14400  
CONNECT 19200  
CONNECT 7200  
CONNECT 12000  
CONNECT 16800  
CONNECT 300  
CONNECT 21600  
CONNECT 24000  
CONNECT 26400  
CONNECT 28800  
CONNECT 31200  
CONNECT 33600  
CONNECT 45000  
CONNECT 56000  
DELAYED  
The remote system did not answer.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
24  
2
Modem detected carrier at 2400 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 4800 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 9600 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 14400 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 19200 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 7200 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 12000 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 16800 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 300 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 21600 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 24000 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 26400 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 28800 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 31200 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 33600 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 45000 bps and gone online.  
Modem detected carrier at 56000 bps and gone online.  
Delay is in effect for the dialed number.  
86  
40  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
88  
89  
90  
BLACKLISTED  
BLACKLIST FULL  
The dialed number is blacklisted.  
The blacklist is full.  
RF300E/RF310E  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Extended Result Codes. If the extended result codes configuration option is enabled, EC is added  
to the following result codes:  
5
CONNECT 1200  
CONNECT 2400  
CONNECT 4800  
CONNECT 9600  
CONNECT 14400  
CONNECT 19200  
CONNECT 7200  
CONNECT 12000  
CONNECT 16800  
CONNECT 300  
CONNECT 21600  
CONNECT 24000  
CONNECT 26400  
CONNECT 28800  
CONNECT 31200  
CONNECT 33600  
CONNECT 45000  
CONNECT 56000  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
24  
25  
86  
40  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
EC is replaced by one of the following codes, depending on the type of error control connection:  
Code Error Correction  
V42bis  
V42  
LAP-M V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression  
LAP-M V.42 error control only  
MNP5  
MNP4  
NoEC  
MNP4 error control and MNP 5 data compression  
MNP 4 error control only  
No error control protocol  
RF300E/RF310E  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Access Device  
Glossary of Terms  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
A
Access: The T1 line element made up of two pairs of wire that the phone company brings to the customer premises. The  
Access portion ends with a connection at the local telco (LEC or RBOC).  
Accunet Spectrum of Digital Services (ASDS): The AT&T 56K bps leased (private) line service. Similar to services of MCI  
and Sprint. ASDS is available in nx56/64K bps, where n=1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12.  
ACK (ACKnowledgement code) (pronounced “ack”): A communications code sent from a receiving modem to a  
transmitting modem to indicate that it is ready to accept data. It is also used to acknowledge the error-free receipt of  
transmitted data. Contrast with NAK.  
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM): In multimedia applications, a technique in which pulse code  
modulation samples are compressed before they are stored on a disk. ADPCM, an extension of the PCM format, is a  
standard encoding format for storing audio information in a digital format. It reduced storage requirements by storing  
differences between successive digital samples rather than full values.  
Address: A numbered location inside a computer. It’s how the computer accesses its resources, like a video card, serial  
ports, memory, etc.  
AMI line coding: One of two common methods of T1 line coding (with B8ZS). AMI line coding places restrictions on user  
data (B8ZS does not).  
Analog signal: A waveform which has amplitude, frequency and phase, and which takes on a range of values between its  
maximum and minimum points.  
Analog Transmission: One of two types of telecommunications which uses an analog signal as a carrier of voice, data,  
video, etc. An analog signal becomes a carrier when it is modulated by altering its phase, amplitude and frequency to  
correspond with the source signal. Compare with digital transmission.  
Application Program Interface (API): A software module created to allow dissimilar, or incompatible applications programs  
to transfer information over a communications link. APIs may be simple or complex; they are commonly required to link PC  
applications with mainframe programs.  
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) (pronounced “askey”): A binary code for data that is  
used in communications and in many computers and terminals. The code is used to represent numbers, letters, punctuation  
and control characters. The basic ASCII code is a 7-bit character set which defines 128 possible characters. The extended  
ASCII file provides 255 characters.  
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM): A very high-speed method of transmission that uses fixed-size cells of 53 bytes to  
transfer information over fiber; also known as cell relay.  
AT Commands: A standard set of commands used to configure various modem parameters, establish connections and  
disconnect. The “AT” is used to get the “attention” of the modem before the actual command is issued.  
Availability: The measure of the time during which a circuit is ready for use; the complement of circuit “outage” (100%  
minus % outage = % available).  
B
B7ZS (Bipolar 7 Zero Suppression) line coding: One method of T1 line coding (see also “B8ZS” and “AMI”). B7ZS line  
coding does not place restrictions on user data (AMI does).  
B8ZS (Bipolar 8 Zero Suppression) line coding: One of two common methods of T1 line coding (with AMI). B8ZS line  
coding does not place restrictions on user data (AMI does). A coding method used to produce 64K bps “clear” transmission.  
(See also “B7ZS” and “AMI” line coding)  
Backbone: 1. A set of nodes and their interconnecting links providing the primary data path across a network. 2. In a local  
area network multiple-bridge ring configuration, a high-speed link to which the rings are connected by means of bridges. A  
backbone may be configured as a bus or as a ring. 3. In a wide area network, a high-speed link to which nodes or data  
switching exchanges (DSEs) are connected. 4. A common distribution core that provides all electrical power, gases,  
chemicals, and other services to the sectors of an automated wafer processing system.  
Background: An activity that takes place in the PC while you are running another application. In other words, the active  
user interface does not correspond to the ‘background’ task.  
Bandwidth: The transmission capacity of a computer channel, communications line or bus. It is expressed in cycles per  
second (hertz), the bandwidth being the difference between the lowest and highest frequencies transmitted. The range of  
usable frequencies that a transmission medium will pass without unacceptable attenuation or distortion. Bandwidth is a  
factor in determining the amount of information and the speed at which a medium can transmit data or other information.  
Backward Explicit Congestion Notification (BECN): A bit that tells you that a certain frame on a particular logical  
connection has encountered heavy traffic. The bit provides notification that congestion-avoidance procedures should be  
initiated in the opposite direction of the received frame. See also FECN (Forward Explicit Congestion Notification).  
184  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Basic Rate Interface (BRI): An ISDN access interface type comprised of two B-channels each at 64K bps and one D-  
channel at 64K bps (2B+D).  
Bell Operating Companies (BOC): The family of corporations created during the divestiture of AT&T. BOCs are  
independent companies which service a specific region of the US. Also called Regional Bell Operating Companies  
(RBOCs).  
Bell Pub 41450: The Bell publication defining requirements for data format conversion, line conditioning, and termination  
for direct DDS connection.  
Bell Pub 62310: The Bell publication defining requirements for data format conversion, line conditioning, and termination  
for direct DDS connection.  
Binary Synchronous Communication (BSC): A form of telecommunication line control that uses a standard set of  
transmission control characters and control character sequences, for binary synchronous transmission of binary-coded data  
between stations.  
Bit (Binary digIT): A bit is the basis of the binary number system. It can take the value of 1 or 0. Bits are generally  
recognized as the electrical charge generated or stored by a computer that represent some portion of usable information.  
Bit Error Rate Test (BERT): A device or routine that measures the quality of data transmission. A known bit pattern is  
transmitted, and the errors received are counted and a BER (bit error rate) is calculated. The BER is the ratio of received  
bits in error relative to the total number of bits received, expressed in a power of 10.  
Bit robbing: The use of the least significant bit per channel in every sixth frame for signaling. The line signal bits “robbed”  
from the speech part conveys sufficient pre-ISDN telephony signaling information with the remaining line signal bits  
providing sufficient line signaling bits for recreating the original sound. See “robbed bit signaling”.  
Blue Alarm: An error indication signal consisting of all 1s indicating disconnection or attached device failure. Contrast “Red  
Alarm” and “Yellow Alarm”.  
Bps (bits per second): A unit to measure the speed at which data bits can be transmitted or received. Bps differs from  
baud when more than one bit is represented by a single cycle of the carrier.  
Bridges: 1. A functional unit that interconnects two local area networks that use the same logical link protocol but may use  
different medium access control protocols. 2. A functional unit that interconnects multiple LANs (locally or remotely) that use  
the same logical link control protocol but that can use different medium access control protocols. A bridge forwards a frame  
to another bridge based on the medium access control (MAC) address. 3. In the connection of local loops, channels, or  
rings, the equipment and techniques used to match circuits and to facilitate accurate data transmission.  
Buffer: A temporary storage register or Random Access Memory (RAM) used in all aspects of data communications which  
prevents data from being lost due to differences in transmission speed. Keyboards, serial ports, muxes and printers are a  
few examples of the devices that contain buffers.  
Bus: A common channel between hardware devices either internally between components in a computer, or externally  
between stations in a communications network.  
Byte: The unit of information a computer can handle at one time. The most common understanding is that a byte consists  
of 8 binary digits (bits), because that’s what computers can handle. A byte holds the equivalent of a single character (such  
as the letter A).  
C
Call Setup Time: The time to establish a circuit-switched call between two points. Includes dialing, wait time, and CO/long  
distance service movement time.  
Carrier Group Alarm (CGA): A T1 service alarm generated by a channel bank when an OOF condition occurs for a  
predefined length of time (usually 300mS to 2.5 seconds). The CGA causes the calls using a trunk to be dropped and for  
trunk conditioning to be applied.  
Carrier signal: An analog signal with known frequency, amplitude and phase characteristics used as a transport facility for  
useful information. By knowing the original characteristics, a receiver can interpret any changes as modulations, and  
thereby recover the information.  
CCITT (Consultative Committee for International Telephone and Telegraph): An advisory committee created and  
controlled by the United Nations and headquartered in Geneva whose purpose is to develop and to publish  
recommendations for worldwide standardization of telecommunications devices. CCITT has developed modem standards  
that are adapted primarily by PTT (post, telephone and telegraph) organizations that operate phone networks of countries  
outside of the U.S. See also ITU.  
Central Office (CO): The lowest, or most basic level of switching in the PSTN (public switched telephone network). A  
business PABX or any residential phone connects to the PSTN at a central office.  
Centrex: A multi-line service offered by operating telcos which provides, from the telco CO, functions and features  
comparable to those of a PBX for large business users. See also “Private Branch Exchange”, “Exchange”.  
RF300E/RF310E  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Channel: A data communications path between two computer devices. Can refer to a physical medium (e.g., UTP or coax),  
or to a specific carrier frequency.  
Channel Bank: A device that acts as a converter, taking the digital signal from the T1 line into a phone system and  
converting it to the analog signals used by the phone system. A channel bank acts as a multiplexer, placing many slow-  
speed voice or data transactions on a single high-speed link.  
Circuit-switched Network: A technology used by the PSTN that allocates a pair of conductors for the exclusive use of one  
communication path. Circuit switching allows multiple conversations on one talk path only if the end-users multiplex the  
signals prior to transmission.  
Circuit Switching: The temporary connection of two or more communications channels using a fixed, non-shareable path  
through the network. Users have full use of the circuit until the connection is terminated.  
Clear Channel: A transmission path where the full bandwidth is used (i.e., no bandwidth needed for signaling, carrier  
framing or control bits). A 64K bps digital circuit usually has 8K bps used for signaling. ISDN has two 64K bps circuits, and a  
16K bps packet service of which part is used for signaling on the 64K channels.  
Client-Server: In TCP/IP, the model of interaction in distributed data processing in which a program at one site sends a  
request to a program at another site and awaits a response. The requesting program is called a client; the answering  
program is called a server.  
Cluster Controller: A device that can control the input/output operations of more than one device connected to it. A cluster  
controller may be controlled by a program stored and executed in the unit, or it may be entirely controlled by hardware.  
Committed Burst Size: The maximum number of bits that the frame relay network agrees to transfer during any  
measurement interval.  
Committed Information Rate (CIR): An agreement a customer makes to use a certain minimum data transmission rate (in  
bps). The CIR is part of the frame relay service monthly billing, along with actual usage, that users pay to their frame relay  
service provider.  
Compression: 1. The process of eliminating gaps, empty fields, redundancies, and unnecessary data to shorten the length  
of records or blocks. 2. In SNA, the replacement of a string of up to 64-repeated characters by an encoded control byte to  
reduce the length of the data stream to the LU-LU session partner. The encoded control byte is followed by the character  
that was repeated (unless that character is the prime compression character). 3. In Data Facility Hierarchical Storage  
Manager, the process of moving data instead of allocated space during migration and recall in order to release unused  
space. 4. Contrast with decompression.  
COMx Port: A serial communications port on a PC.  
Congestion: A network condition where there is too much data traffic. The ITU I.233 standard defines congestion  
managemennt in terms of speed and burstiness.  
Congestion Notification: The function in frame relay that ensures that user data transmitted at a rate higher than the CIR  
are allowed to slow down to the rate of the available network bandwidth.  
Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (CSES): An error condition that occurs when from 3 to 9 SES (Severely Errored  
Seconds) are logged consecutively.  
Customer Premise Equipment (CPE): The generic term for data comm and/or terminal equipment that resides at the user  
site and is owned by the user with the following exclusions: Over voltage protection equipment, inside wiring, coin operated  
or pay telephones, “company-official” equipment, mobile telephone equipment, “911” equipment, equipment necessary for  
the provision of communications for national defense, or multiplexing equipment used to deliver multiple channels to the  
customer.  
D
D4: the T1 4th generation channel bank.  
D4 channelization: Refers to the compliance with AT&T TR 62411 for DS1 frame layout.  
D4 framing: The T1 format for framing in AT&T D-Series channel banks, in which there are 12 separate 193-bit frames in a  
super-frame. A D4 framing bit is used to identify the channel and the signaling frame. Signalling for voice channels is carried  
in-band for every channel, along with the encoded voice. See “robbed-bit signaling”.  
Data Communications Equipment (DCE): Any device which serves as the portal of entry from the user equipment to a  
telecommunications facility. A modem is a DCE for the telephone network (PSTN) that is commonly on site at the user’s  
premises. Packet Switched Networks have another level of DCE which is most often located at a central office.  
Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI): One of the six components of a frame relay frame. Its purpose is to distinguish  
separate virtual circuits across each access connection. Data coming into a frame relay node is thus allowed to be sent  
across the interface to the specified “address”. The DLCI is confirmed and relayed to its destination, or if the specification is  
in error, the frame is discarded.  
Dataphone Digital Service (DDS): A private line digital service that offers 2400, 4800, 9600 and 56K bps data rates on an  
186  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
inter-LATA basis by AT&T and on an intra-LATA basis by the BOCs.  
Data Service Unit (DSU): A device that provides a digital data service interface directly to the data terminal equipment. The  
DSU provides loop equalization, remote and local testing capabilities, and a standard EIA/CCITT interface.  
Dedicated Line: A communication line that is not switched. The term leased line is more common.  
Default: This is a preset value or option in software packages, or in hardware configuration, that is used unless you specify  
otherwise.  
Device driver: Software that controls how a computer communicates with a device, such as a printer or mouse.  
Digital Cross-connect System (DCS): The CO device which splits and redistributes the T1 bandwidth. the DCS takes time  
slots from various T1 lines and alters them to provide the needed connectivity. DCS connections are made with software at  
an administrator’s workstation.  
Digital Data: Information represented by discrete values or conditions (contrast “Analog Data”).  
Digital Loopback: A technique used for testing the circuitry of a communications device. Can be initiated locally, or  
remotely (via a telecommunications device). The tested device decodes and encodes a received test message, then echoes  
the message back. The results are compared with the original message to determine if corruption occurred en route.  
Digital PBX: A Private Branch Exchange that operates internally on digital signals. See also “Exchange”.  
Digital Service, level 0 (DS0): The worldwide standard speed (64 Kbps) for digital voice conversation using PCM (pulse  
coded modulation).  
Digital Service, level 1 (DS1): The 1.544 Mbps voice standard (derived from an older Bell System standard) for digitized  
voice transmission in North America. The 1.544 Mbps consists of 24 digitally-encoded 64 Kbps voice channels (north  
America) and 2.048 Mbps (30 channels) elsewhere.  
Digital Signal: A discrete or discontinuous signal (e.g., a sequence of voltage pulses). Digital devices, such as terminals  
and computers, transmit data as a series of electrical pulses which have discrete jumps rather than gradual changes.  
Digital Signaling Rates (DSn): A hierarchical system for transmission rates, where “DS0” is 64K bps (equivalent to ISDN B  
channel), and DS1 is 1.5 Mbps (equivalent to ISDN PRI).  
Digital Transmission: A method of electronic information transmission common between computers and other digital  
devices. Analog signals are waveforms: a combination of many possible voltages. A computer’s digital signal may be only  
“high” or “low” at any given time. Therefore, digital signals may be “cleaned up” (noise and distortion removed) and  
amplified during transmission.  
Digitize: To convert an analog signal to a digital signal.  
DIP switch (pronounced “dip switch”): A set of tiny toggle switches, built into a DIP (dual in-line package), used for  
setting configurable parameters on a PCB (printed circuit board).  
Driver: A software module that interfaces between the Operating System and a specific hardware device (e.g., color  
monitors, printers, hard disks, etc.). Also known as a device driver.  
Drop and Insert: The process where a portion of information carried in a transmission system is demodulated (“Dropped”)  
at an intermediate point and different information is included (“Inserted”) for subsequent transmission.  
DTE (Data Terminal Equipment): A term used to include any device in a network which generates, stores or displays user  
information. DTE is a telecommunications term which usually refers to PCs, terminals, printers, etc.  
DTMF (Dual-Tone MultiFrequency): A generic push-button concept made popular by AT&T TouchTone.  
E
E&M: A telephony trunking system used for either switch-to-switch, or switch-to-network, or computer/telephone system-to-  
switch connection.  
EIA: The Electronics Industries Association is a trade organization in Washington, DC that sets standards for use of its  
member companies. (See RS-232, RS-422, RS530.)  
Encapsulation: A technique used by network-layer protocols in which a layer adds header information to the protocol data  
unit from the preceding layer. Also used in “enveloping” one protocol inside another for transmission. For example, IP inside  
IPX.  
Errored Seconds (ES): Any second of operation that all 1.544M bits are not received exactly as transmitted. Contrast  
“Error Free Seconds”.  
Error Free Seconds (EFS): Any second of operation that all 1.544M bits are received exactly as transmitted. Contrast  
“Errored Seconds”.  
ESF Error Event: A T1 error condition that is logged when a CRC-6 error or an out-of-frame (OOF) error occurs.  
RF300E/RF310E  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Ethernet: A 10-megabit baseband local area network that allows multiple stations to access the transmission medium at will  
without prior coordination, avoids contention by using carrier sense and deference, and resolves contention by using  
collision detection and transmission. Ethernet uses carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD).  
Excess Zeros: A T1 error condition that is logged when more than 15 consecutive 0s or fewer than one 1 bit in 16 bits  
occurs.  
Exchange: A unit (public or private) that can consist of one or more central offices established to serve a specified area. An  
exchange typically has a single rate of charges (tariffs) that has previously been approved by a regulatory group.  
Exchange Area: A geographical area with a single uniform set of charges (tariffs), approved by a regulatory group, for  
telephone services. Calls between any two points within an exchange area are local calls. See also “Digital PBX”, “PBX”.  
Exchange Termination (ET): The carrier’s local exchange switch. Contrast with “Loop Termination - LT”.  
Explicit Congestion Management: The method used in frame relay to notify the terminal equipment that the network is  
overly busy. The use of FECN and BECN is called explicit congestion management. Some end-to-end protocols use FECN  
or BECN, but usually not both options together. With this method, a congestion condition is identified and fixed before it  
becomes critical. Contrast with “implicit congestion”.  
Extended Super Frame (ESF): One of two popular formats for framing bits on a T1 line. ESF framing has a 24-frame  
super-frame, where robbed bit signaling is inserted in the LSB (bit 8 of the DS-0 byte) of frames 6, 12, 18 and 24. ESF has  
more T1 error measurement capabilities than D4 framing. Both ESF and B8ZS are typically offered to provide clear channel  
service.  
F
Failed Seconds: A test parameter where the circuit is unavailable for one full second.  
Failed Signal: A T1 test parameter logged when there are more than 9 SES (Severely Errored Seconds).  
Fax (facsimile): Refers to the bit-mapped rendition of a graphics-oriented document (fax) or to the electronic transmission  
of the image over telephone lines (faxing). Fax transmission differs from data transmission in that the former is a bit-  
mapped approximation of a graphical document and, therefore, cannot be accurately interpreted according to any character  
code.  
Firmware: A category of memory chips that hold their content without electrical power, they include ROM, PROM, EPROM  
and EEPROM technologies. Firmware becomes “hard software” when holding program code.  
Foreground: The application program currently running on and in control of the PC screen and keyboard. The area of the  
screen that occupies the active window. Compare with “background”.  
Fractional T1 (FT1): A digital data transmission rate between 56K bps (DS0 rate) and 1.544M bps (the full T1 rate - in  
North America). FT1 is typically provided on 4-wire (two copper pairs) UTP. Often used for video conferencing, imaging and  
LAN interconnection due to its low cost and relatively high speed. FT1 rates are offered in 64K bps multiples, usually up to  
768K bps.  
Frequency: A characteristic of an electrical or electronic signal which describes the periodic recurrence of cycles.  
Frequency is inversely proportional to the wavelength or pulse width of the signal (i.e., long wavelength signals have low  
frequencies and short wavelength signals yield high frequencies).  
Foreign Exchange (FX): A CO trunk with access to a distant CO, allowing ease of access and flat-rate calls anywhere in  
the foreign exchange area.  
Foreign Exchange Office (FXO): provides local telephone service from a CO outside of (“foreign” to) the subscriber’s  
exchange area. In simple form, a user can pick up the phone in one city and receive a tone in the foreign city. Connecting a  
POTS telephone to a computer telephony system via a T1 link requires a channel bank configured for the FX connection. To  
generate a call from the POTS set to the computer telephony system, a FXO connection must be configured.  
Foreign Exchange Station (FXS): See FX, FXO. To generate a call from the computer telephony system to the POTS set,  
an FXS connection must be configured.  
Forward Explicit Congestion Notification (FECN): A bit that tells you that a certain frame on a particular logical  
connection has encountered heavy traffic. The bit provides notification that congestion-avoidance procedures should be  
initiatedin the same direction of the received frame. See also BECN (Backward Explicit Congestion Notification).  
Frame: A group of data bits in a specific format to help network equipment recognize what the bits mean and how to  
process them. The bits are sent serially, with a flag at each end signifying the start and end of the frame.  
Frame Relay: A form of packet switching that uses small packets and that requires less error checking than other forms of  
packet switching. Frame relay is effective for sending “bursty” data at high speeds (56/64K, 256K, and 1024K bps) over  
wide area networks. Frame Relay specifications are defined by ANSI documents ANSI T1.602, T1.606, T1S1/90-175, T1S1/  
90-213, and T1S1/90-214. In using frame relay, blocks of information (frames) are passed across a digital network interface  
using a “connection number” that is applied to each frame to distinguish between individual frames.  
Frame Relay Forum: A non-profit organization of 300+ vendors and service providers, based in Foster City, CA, that are  
188  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
developing and deploying frame relay equipment.  
Frame Relay Implementors Forum: A group of companies supporting a common specification for frame relay connection  
to link customer premises equipment to telco network equipment. Their specification supports ANSI frame relay specs and  
defines extensions such as local management.  
Frame Relay Access Device (FRAD): A piece of equipment that acts as a concentrator or frame assembler/dissassember  
that can support multiple protocols and provide basic “routing” functions.  
G
Gateway: 1. A functional unit that interconnects two computer networks with different network architectures. A gateway  
connects networks or systems of different architectures. A bridge interconnects networks or systems with the same or  
similar architectures. 2. A network that connects hosts.  
Graphical User Interface (GUI): A type of computer interface consisting of a visual metaphor of a real-world scene, often  
of a desktop. Within that scene are icons, representing actual objects, that the user can access and manipulate with a  
pointing device.  
H
Handshaking: A process that two modems go through at the time of call setup to establish synchronization over the data  
communications link. It is a synchronization and negotiation process accomplished by the exchange of predefined, mutually  
recognized control codes.  
High-level Data Link Control (HDLC): An ISO standard, bit-oriented data communications protocol that provides nearly  
error-free data transfers.  
I
Hexadecimal: A base 16 numbering system used to represent binary values. Hex uses the numbers 0-9 and the letters A-F:  
usually notated by an “h” (e.g., “4CF h”, read “four charley fox, hex”). The result is that one hex digit represents a 4-bit  
value.  
Implicit congestion management: A method of informing the terminal that the network is busy. This method relies on the  
end-system protocol to detect and fix the congestion problem. (TCP/IP is an example of a protocol using only implicit  
congestion management.) See also “explicit congestion management”.  
In-band: Refers to the type of signalling over the conversion path on an ISDN call. Contrast “out-of-band”.  
Insufficient Ones: A T1 error condition that is logged when fewer than one 1 in 16 0s or less than 12.5 % average 1s  
density is received.  
Inter Exchange Carrier (IEC): The long distance company (LE) who’s central office provides the point of reference for T1  
access. Any common carrier authorized by the FCC to carry customer transmissions between LATAs.  
Internet: Refers to the computer network of many millions of university, government and private users around the world.  
Each user has a unique Internet Address.  
Internet Address (IP Address): A unique 32-bit address for a specific TCP/IP host on a network. Normally printed in dotted  
decimal format (e.g., 129.128.44.227).  
Internet Protocol (IP): A protocol used to route data from its source to its destination in an Internet enviroment. The  
Internet Protocol was designed to connect local area networks. Although there are many protocols that do this, IP refers to  
the global system of interconnecting computers. It is a highly distributed protocol (each machine only worries about sending  
data to the next step in the route).  
Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX): A NetWare communications protocol used to route messages from one node to  
another. IPX packets include network addresses and can be routed from one network to another. An IPX packet can  
occasionally get lost when crossing networks, thus IPX does not guarantee delivery of a complete message. Either the  
application has to provide that control, or NetWare’s SPX protocol must be used.  
Interoperable: Devices from different vendors that can exchange information using a standard’s base protocol.  
I/O Addresses: Locations within the I/O address space of your computer used by a device, such as an expansion card, a  
serial port, or an internal modem. The address is used for communication between software and a device.  
IRQ Level (Interrupt Request Level): The notification a processor receives when another portion of the computer’s  
hardware requires its attention. IRQs are numbered so that the device issuing the IRQ can be identified, and so IRQs can  
be prioritized.  
ISA (Industry Standards Architecture) (pronounced “ice a”): The classic 8 or 16-bit architecture introduced with IBM’s  
PC-AT computer.  
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network): An International telecommunications standard for transmitting voice, video  
RF300E/RF310E  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
and data over a digital communications line. ISDN is a world-wide telecommunications service that uses digital transmission  
and switching technology to support voice and digital data communications. Frame relay was partially based on ISDN’s data  
link layer protocol (LAPD). Frame relay can be used to transmit across ISDN services offering circuit-switched connection at  
64K bps and higher speeds. Contrast Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).  
ITU-TSS (formerly CCITT): International Telecommunications Union-Telecommunications Sector; the United Nations  
organization that prepares standards (“Recommendations”) for resolving communications issues and problems.  
J
No Entries.  
K
Key Telephone System (KTS): Phone devices with multiple buttons that let you select incoming or outgoing CO phone  
lines directly. Similar in operation to a PBX, except with a KTS you don’t have to dial a “9” to call outside the building.  
Key Service Unit (KSU): A small device containing the switching electronics for a business key telephone system (KTS).  
Key Set: A phone set with several buttons for call holding, line pickup, intercom, autodialing, etc. Also called a touchtone  
phone (Ericsson) and a KTS (Key Telephone Set).  
L
LAPB: Link Access Procedure Balanced; based on the X.25 Layer 2 specification. A full-duplex, point-to-point, bit-  
synchronous protocol commonly used as a data link control protocol to interface X.25 DTEs. LAPB is the link initialization  
procedure that establishes and maintains communications between the DTE and the DCE.  
LAPD: Link Access Protocol for the D-Channel; based on the ISDN Q.921 specification. A full-duplex point-to-point bit-  
synchronous link-level protocol for ISDN connections; different from LAPB in its framing sequence. Transmission is in units  
called “frames”, and a frame may contain one or more X.25 packets.  
Line Coding: The representation of 1s and 0s on a T1 line. The two methods of line coding commonly used, B8ZS and  
AMI, differ in the restrictions placed on user data. T1 line coding ensures that sufficient timing information is sent with the  
digital signal to ensure recovery of all the bits at the far end. Timing information on the T1 line is included in the form of 1s  
in the data stream; a long string of 0s in the data stream could cause problems recovering the data.  
Line Termination (LT): The electronics at the ISDN network side of the user/network interface that complements the NT1  
at the user side. The LT and the NT1 together provide the high-speed digital line signals required for BRI access.  
Listed Directory Number (LDN): The main number assigned by the telco; the number listed in the phone directory and  
also provided by Directory Assistance. Some devices can have more than one LDN, such as ISDN devices that have one  
LDN for voice and another LDN for data.  
Local Area Network (LAN): 1. A computer network located on a user’s premises within a limited geographical area.  
Communication within a local area network is not subject to external regulations; however, communication across the LAN  
boundary may be subject to some form of regulation. 2. A LAN does not use store-and-forward techniques. 3. A network in  
which a set of devices are connected to one another for a communication and that can be connected to a larger network.  
Local Access and Transport Area (LATA): A post-divestiture geographical area generally equivalent to a Standard  
Metropolitan Statistical Area. At divestiture, the territory served by the Bell system was divided into approximately 161  
LATAs. The Bell Operating Companies (BOCs) provide Intra-LATA services.  
Local Exchange Carrier (LEC): The local phone company which provides local (i.e., not long distance) transmission  
services. AKA “telco”. LECs provide T1 or FT1 access to LDCs (unless the T1 circuit is completely intra-LATA). Inter-LATA  
T1 circuits are made up of a combination of Access and Long Haul facilities.  
Local Management Interface (LMI): A specification for frame relay equipment that defines status information exchange.  
Local Loop: A transmission path, typically twisted-pair wire, between an individual subscriber and the nearest public  
telecommunications network switching center. The wires provide ISDN service, but require an NT1 at the user end and an  
LT at the network end. (AKA, “loop” or “subscriber loop”.)  
Logical Link Control (LLC2): In a local area network, the protocol that governs the exchange of transmission frames  
between data stations independently of how the transmission medium is shared. The LLC2 protocol was developed by the  
IEEE 802 commitee and is common to all LAN standards.  
Logical Unit (LU): A type of network accessible unit that enables end users to gain access to network resources and  
communicate with each other.  
Long Haul: The T1 element that connects to the Access portion of the long distance company’s (LDC’s) central office. The  
LDC is commonly called the point of presence (POP). Each LDC has a number of POPs, located throughout the country.  
The LDC is also called an IEC (Inter Exchange Carrier).  
Long Haul Communications: The type of phone call reaching outside of a local exchange (LE).  
190  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
M
Management Information Base (MIB): A database of network management information used by the Common  
Management Information Protocol (CMIP) and the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).  
Megacom: An AT&T service with a normal WATS line (typically T1) between the customer premise and the AT&T serving  
class 4 CO are the customer’s responibility.  
MegaLink: BellSouth’s leased T1 service.  
Message: Associated with such terms as packet, frame, and segment. 1. In information theory, an ordered series of  
characters intended to convey information. 2. An assembly of characters and sometimes control codes that is transferred as  
an entry from an originator to one or more recipients.  
Modem: A communications device that enables a computer to transmit information over a phone line. It converts the  
computer’s digital signals into analog signals to send over a phone line and converts them back to digital signals at the  
receiving end. Modems can be internal and fit into an expansion slot, or external and connect to a serial port.  
Multiplexer (Mux): 1. A device that takes several input signals and combines them into a single output signal in such a  
manner that each of the input signals can be recovered. 2. A device capable of interleaving the events of two or more  
activities or capable of distributing the events of an interleaved sequence to the respective activities. 3. Putting multiple  
signals on a single channel.  
Multiprotocol: A device that can interoperate with devices utilizing different network protocols.  
RASFinder: A secure gateway that provides multiple LAN users with high performance Internet access by functioning as a  
TCP/IP RASFinder that resides on the outer edge of a firewall.  
Multithreading: The ability of a software system to be able to handle more than one transaction concurrently. This is  
contrasted to the case where a single transaction is accepted and completely processed befor the next transaction  
processing is started.  
N
Nailed Connection: A permanent or dedicated circuit of a previously switched circuit or circuits.  
Nailed-up Circuit: A semi-permanent circuit established through a circuit-switching facility for point-to-point connectivity.  
NAK (Negative Acknowledgment): Communications code used to indicate that a message was not properly received, or  
that a terminal does not wish to transmit. Contrast with ACK.  
Network: A group of computers connected by cables or other means and using software that enables them to share  
equipment, such as printers and disk drives to exchange information.  
Node: Any point within a network which has been assigned an address.  
O
Object-Oriented: A method for structuring programs as hierarchically organized classes describing the data and operations  
of objects that may interact with other objects.  
Office Channel Unit - Data Port (OCU-DP): The CO channel bank used as the interface between the customer’s DSU and  
the channel bank.  
Off-hook: The condition of a device which has accessed a phone line (with or without using the line). In modem use, this is  
equivalent to a phone handset being picked up. Dialing and transmission are allowed, but incoming calls are not answered.  
Contrast “on-hook”.  
Off Premise Extension (OPX): An extension or phone that terminates in a location other than that of the PBX. Commonly  
used to provide a corporate member with an extension of the PBX at home.  
Ones Density: the measure of the number of logical 1s on a T1 line compared to a given total number of bits on that line;  
used for timing information in data recovery in AMI and B8ZS.  
On-Hook: The condition of a device which has not accessed a phone line. In modem use, this is equivalent to a telephone  
handset that has not been picked up. In other words, it can receive an incoming call. Contrast “off-hook”.  
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF): A hierarchical Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) routing algorithm for IP that is a  
proposed standard for the Internet. OSPF incorporates least-cost routing, equal-cost routing, and load balancing.  
Outage: The measure of the time during which a circuit is not available for use due to service interrupt. Outage is the  
complement of circuit “availability” (100% minus % available = % outage).  
Out-of-band: Signaling that is separated from the channel carrying the information (e.g., the voice/data/video signal is  
separate from the carrier signal). Dialing and various other “supervisory” signals are included in the signaling element.  
Contrast “In-band” signaling.  
RF300E/RF310E  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Out of Frame (OOF): A T1 alarm condition that is logged on the loss of 2, 3 or 4 of 5 consecutive FT framing bits.  
P
Packet: 1. In data communication, a sequence of binary digits, including data and control signals, that is transmitted and  
switched as a composite whole. The data, control signals and, possibly, error control information are arranged in a specific  
format. 2. Synonymous with data frame. 3. In TCP/IP, the unit of data passed across the interface between the Internet  
layer and the link layer. A packet includes an IP header and data. A packet can be a complete IP datagram or a fragment of  
an IP diagram. 4. In X.25, a data transmission information unit. A group of data and control characters, transferred as a unit,  
determined by the process of transmission. Commonly used data field lengths in packets are 128 or 256 bytes. 5. The field  
structure and format defined in the CCITT X.25 recommendation.  
Packet Assembler/Dissembler (PAD): Used by devices to communicate over X.25 networks by building or stripping X.25  
information on or from a packet.  
Packet Data: The information format (“packetized”) used for packet-mode calls.  
Packet Mode: Refers to the switching of chunks of information for different users using statistical multiplexing to send them  
over the same transmission facility.  
Parity bit: An extra bit attached to each byte of synchronous data used to detect errors in transmission.  
Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC): A connection between two endpoints dedicated to a single user. In ISDN, PVCs are  
establised by network administration and are held for as long as the user subscribes to the service.  
Physical Unit (PU): The component that manages and monitors the resources (such as attached links and adjacent link  
stations) associated with a node, as requested by an SSCP via an SSCP-PU session. An SSCP activates a session with the  
physical unit in order to indirectly manage, through the PU, resources of the node such as attached links. This term applies  
to type 2.0, type 4, and type 5 nodes only.  
Point of Presence (POP): The central office’s end points of the long distance carriers.  
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP): A protocol that lets a PC user access TCP/IP (Internet memeber) using an ISDN terminal  
adapter or a high-speed modem over a standard phone line.  
Port: A location for input or output data exchange. Computers, muxes, etc. have ports for various purposes.  
Primary Rate Interface (PRI): Used on ISDN. In North America, and Japan, PRI is one 64 Kbps D channel and 23 B  
channels. Elsewhere, it is one D channel and 30 B channels.  
Primitive: An abstract representation of interaction across the access points indicating that information is being passed  
between the service user and the service provider. The OSI Reference Model defines four types of primitives: Request,  
Indication, Response and Confirm.  
Private Branch Exchange (PBX): A phone exchange located on the customer’s premises. The PBX provides a circuit  
switching facility for phone extension lines within the building, and access to the public phone network. See also  
“Exchange”.  
PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory - pronounced “prom”): A permanent memory chip that can be programmed  
or filled by the customer after by the manufacturer has set initial values. Contrast with ROM.  
Protocol: 1. A set of semantic and syntactic rules that determines the behavior of functional units in achieving  
communication. 2. In Open Systems Interconnection architecture, a set of semantic and syntactic rules that determine the  
behavior of entities in the same layer in performing communication functions. 3. In SNA, the meanings of and the  
sequencing rules for requests and responses used for managing the network, transferring data, and synchronizing the  
states of network components. 4. Synonymous with line control discipline.  
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network): A worldwide public voice telephone network that is used as a  
telecommunications medium for the transmission of voice, data and other information.  
Public Data Network (PDN): A packet-switched network that is available to the public for individual (“subscriber”) use.  
Typically, controlled by a government or a national monopoly.  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN): The group of circuit-switching voice carriers, which are commonly used as  
analog data communications services.  
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM): 1. In data communication, variation of a digital signal to represent information; for  
example, by means of pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), pulse duration modulation (PDM), or pulse position modulation  
(PPM). 2. Transmissions of analog information in digital form through sampling and encoding the samples with a fixed  
number of bits.  
Pulse dialing: One of two methods of dialing a telephone, usually associated with rotary-dial phones. Compare with “tone  
dialing”.  
192  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Q
Quantizing: The process of analog-to-digital conversion by assigning a range, from the contiguous analog values, to a  
discrete number.  
R
Random Access Memory (RAM): A computer’s primary workspace. All data must be stored in RAM (even for a short  
while), before software can use the processor to manipulate the data. Before a PC can do anything useful it must move  
programs from disk to RAM. When you turn it off, all information in RAM is lost.  
Rate Enforcement: The concept in frame relay where frames sent faster than the CIR are to be carried only if the  
bandwidth is available, otherwise they are to be discarded. (The frame relay network assumes that anything exceeding the  
CIR is of low priority.) Rate enforcement makes sure that the network will not get so congested that it isn’t able to meet the  
agreed on CIR.  
Recognized Private Operating Agency (RPOA): A corporation, private or government-controlled, that provides  
telecommunications services. RPOAs, such as AT&T, participate as non-voting members in the CCITT.  
Red Alarm: A T1 error condition generated when a local failure (e.g., loss of synchronization) exists for 2.5 seconds,  
causing a Carrier Group Alarm (CGA). See also “Blue Alarm” and “Yellow Alarm”.  
Request for Comment (RFC): A set of papers in which Internet standards (published and proposed), along with generally-  
accepted ideas, proposals, research results, etc. are published.  
Ring Down Box: A device that emulates a CO by generating POTS calls for testing and product demos.  
Ring Down Circuit: A tie line connecting phones where picking up one phone automatically rings another phone. A feature  
used for emergencies to alert the person at the other phone of the incoming call.  
RJ-11: An industry standard interface used for connecting a telephone to a modular wall outlet; comes in 4-and 6-wire  
packages.  
RJ-45: An 8-wire modular connector for voice and data circuits.  
Robbed Bit Signaling: The popular T1 signaling mechanism where the A and B bits are sent by each side of the T1  
termination and are “buried” in the voice data of each voice channel in the T1 circuit. Since the bits are “robbed”  
infrequently, voice quality remains relatively uncompromised. See “bit robbing”. The robbed-bit signaling technique is used  
in D4 channel banks to convey signaling information. The eighth (least significant) bit of each of the 24 8-bit time slots is  
“robbed” every sixth frame to convey voice-related signaling information such as on-hook, off-hook, etc, for each channel.  
Router: A device that connects two networks using the same networking protocol. It operates at the Network Layer (Layer  
3) of the OSI model for forwarding decisions.  
Routing Information Protocol (RIP): A distance vector-based protocol that provides a measure of distance, or hops, from  
a transmitting workstation to a receiving workstation.  
RS232-C: An EIA standard for a serial interface between computers and peripheral devices (modem, mouse, etc.). It uses a  
25-pin DB-25, or a 9-pin DB-9 connector. The RS-232 standard defines the purposes, electrical characteristics and timing of  
the signals for each of the 25 lines.  
RS-422: The EIA standard for a balanced interface with no accompanying physical connector. RS-422 products can use  
screw terminals, DB9, various DB25, and DB37 connectors.  
RS-530: The EIA standard for the mechanical/electrical interface between DCEs and DTEs transmitting synchronous or  
asynchronous serial binary data. RS-530 provides for high data rates with the same connector used for RS-232; however, it  
is incompatible with RS-232.  
S
Serial Port: The connector on a PC used to attach serial devices (those that need to receive data one bit after another),  
such as a mouse, a printer or a modem. This consists of a 9- or 25-pin connector that sends data in sequence (bit by bit).  
Serial ports are referred to as “COMx” ports, where x is 1 to 4 (i.e., COM1 through COM4). A serial port contains a  
conversion chip called a “UART” which translates between internal parallel and external serial formats.  
Service: The requirements offered by an RPOA to its customers to satisfy specific telecommunications needs.  
Severely Errored Seconds (SES): Refers to a typical T1 error event where an error burst occurs (a short term, high bit-  
error rate that is self-clearing). Per the ITU-T (CCITT) G.821: any second in which the BER is less than 1x10 -3 .  
Signaling: The process of establishing, maintaining, accounting for, and terminating a connection between two endpoints  
(e.g., the user premises and the telco CO). Central office signals to the user premises can include ringing, dial tone, speech  
signals, etc. Signals from the user’s telephone can include off-hook, dialing, speech to far-end party, and on-hook signals.  
In-band signaling techniques include pulse and tone dialing. With common channel signaling, information is carried out-of-  
band.  
RF300E/RF310E  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): TCP/IP protocol that allows network management.  
Simultaneous Voice Data (SVD): A technology for letting a user send data via a modem, and use a handset to talk to  
another user at the same time over the same connection. The alternative, making a second call, can be expensive or even  
impossible. The uses for SVD are telecommuting, videoconferencing, distant learning, tech support, etc.  
Stop Bit: One of the variables used for timing in asynchronous data transmission. Depending on the devices, each  
character may be trailed by 1, 1.5, or 2 stop bits.  
Superframe (D4): A T1 transmission format that consists of 12 DS1 frames, or 2316 bits. A DS1 frame consists of 193 bit  
positions. A frame overhead bit is in the first position, and it is used for frame and signaling phase alignment only.  
Subscriber Loop: See “Local loop”.  
Switched 56: A circuit-switched (full duplex digital synchronous data transmission) service that lets you dial a number and  
transmit data to it at 56K bps. It is a relatively low cost service, widely used in North America for telecommuting,  
videoconferencing and high speed data transfers. Many phone companies are (or will be) phasing out Switched 56 in favor  
of ISDN service.  
Switched Virtual Circuit (SVC): A type of data transmission where the connection is maintained only until the call is  
cleared.  
Switched Line: In communications, a physical channel established by dynamically connecting one or more discrete  
segments. This connection lasts for the duration of the call, after which each segment can be used as part of a different  
channel. Contrast with leased line.  
Switched Network: A network in which a temporary connection is established from one point via one or more segments.  
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC): A discipline conforming to subsets of the Advanced Data Communications  
Control Procedures (ADCCP) of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and High-level Data Link Control (HDLC)  
of the International Organization for Standardization, for managing synchronous, code-transparent, serial-by-bit information  
transfer over a link connection. Transmission exchanges may be duplex, or half-duplex over switched or nonswitched links.  
The configuration of the link connection may be point-to-point, multipoint, or loop.  
Synchronous Transmission: The transmission of data which involves sending a group of characters in a packet. This is a  
common method of transmission between computers on a network or between modems. One or more synchronous  
characters are transmitted to confirm clocking before each packet of data is transmitted. Compare to Asynchronous  
Transmission.  
Systems Network Architecture (SNA): The description of the logical structure, formats, protocols, and operational  
sequences for transmitting information units through, and controlling the configuration and operation of, networks.  
T
Tariff: The rate/availability schedule for telephone and ISDN services from a regulated service provider.  
TCP/IP: A set of communication protocols that support peer-to-peer connectivity functions for both local and wide area  
networks.  
T Carrier: The generic name for a digitally multiplexed carrier system. In the North American digital hierarchy, a T is used to  
designate a DS (digital signal) level hierarchy. Examples: T1 (DS1) is a 1.544 M bps 24-channel designation. In Europe, T1  
is called E1. The T Carrier system was originally designed for transmitting digitized voice signals, but has since been  
adapted for digital data applications.  
T1: A digital transmission link capable of 1.544M bps. T1 uses two pairs of normal UTP, and can handle 24 voice  
conversations, each digitized at 64K bps. T1 is a standard for digital transmission in the U.S., Canada, Japan and Hong  
Kong. T1 is the access method for high-speed services such as ATM, frame relay, and SMDS. See also T Carrier, T1 line  
and FT1.  
T1 Channel Tests: A set of diagnostics that vary by carrier, used to verify a T1 channel operation. Can include Tone, Noise  
Level, Impulse Noise Level, Echo Cancelers, Gain, and Crosstalk testing.  
T1 Framing: To digitize and encode analog voice signals requires 8000 samples per second (twice the highest voice  
frequency of 4000 Hz). Encoding in an 8-bit word provides the basic T1 block of 64K bps for voice transmission. This “Level  
0 Signal, as its called, is represented by “DS-0”, or Digital Signal at Level 0. 24 of these voice channels are combined into a  
serial bit stream (using TDM), on a frame-by-frame basis. A frame is a sample of all 24 channels; so adding in a framing bit  
gives a block of 193 bits (24x8+1=193). Frames are transmitted at 8000 per second (the required sample rate), creating a  
1.544M (8000x193=1.544M) transmission rate.  
T1 Line: A digital communications facility that functions as a 24-channel pathway for data or voice transmission. A T1 line is  
composed of two separate elements: the Access element and the Long Haul element.  
T1 Mux: A device used to carry many sources of data on a T1 line. The T1 mux assigns each data source to distinct DS0  
time slots within the T1 signal. Wide bandwidth signals take more than one time slot. Normal voice traffic or 56/64K bps  
data channels take one time slot. The T1 mux may use an internal or external T1 DSU; a “channel bank” device typically  
194  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
uses an external T1 CSU.  
Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Program (TCP/IP): A multi-layer set of protocols developed by the US  
Department of Defense to link dissimilar computers across dissimilar and unreliable LANs.  
Terminal: The screen and keyboard device used in a mainframe environment for interactive data entry. Terminals have no  
“box”, which is to say they have no file storage or processing capabilities.  
Terminal Adapter (TA): An ISDN DTE device for connecting a non-ISDN terminal device to the ISDN network. Similar to a  
protocol converter or an interface converter, a TA connects a non-ISDN device between the R and S interfaces. Typically a  
PC card.  
Tie line: A dedicated circuit linking two points without having to dial a phone number (i.e., the line may be accessed by  
lifting the telephone handset or by pushing a button).  
Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM): Division of a transmission facility into two or more channels by allotting the common  
channel to several different information channels, one at a time.  
Time Slot: One of 24 channels within a T1 line. Each channel has a 64K bps maximum bandwidth. “Time slot” implies the  
time division multiplexing organization of the T1 signal.  
Toll Call: A call to a location outside of your local service area (i.e., a long distance call).  
Tone dialing: One of two methods of dialing a telephone, usually associated with Touch-Tone® (push button) phones.  
Compare with pulse dialing.  
Topology: Physical layout of network components (cables, stations, gateways, and hubs). Three basic interconnection  
topologies are star, ring, and bus networks.  
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP): A communications protocol used in Internet and in any network that follows the US  
Department of Defense standards for internetwork protocol. TCP provides a reliable host-to-host protocol between hosts in  
packet-switched communications networks and in interconnected systems of such networks. It assumes that the Internet  
protocol is the underlying protocol.  
Transport Layer: Layer 4 of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model; provides reliable, end-to-end delivery of data,  
and detects transmission sequential errors.  
Transport Protocol Data Unit (TPDU): A transport header, which is added to every message, contains destination and  
source addressing information that allows the end-to-end routing of messages in multi-layer NAC networks of high  
complexity. They are automatically added to messages as they enter the network and can be stripped off before being  
passed to the host or another device that does not support TPDU’s.  
Trunk: Transmission links that interconnect switching offices.  
TSR (terminate and stay resident): A software program that remains active and in memory after its user interface is  
closed. Similar to a daemon in UNIX environments.  
Tunneling: Encapsulation data in an IP packet for transport across the Internet.  
Twisted pair wiring: A type of cabling with one or more pairs of insulated wires wrapped around each other. An inexpensive  
wiring method used for LAN and telephone applications, also called UTP wiring.  
U
UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter) (pronounced “you art”): A chip that transmits and receives data  
on the serial port. It converts bytes into serial bits for transmission, and vice versa, and generates and strips the start and  
stop bits appended to each character.  
UNIX: An operating system developed by Bell Laboratories that features multiprogramming in a muti-user environment.  
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP): Telephone-type wiring. Tansmission media for 10Base-T.  
V
V.25bis: An ITU-T standard for synchronous communications between a mainframe or host and a modem using HDLC or  
other character-oriented protocol.  
V.54: The ITU-T standard for local and remote loopback tests in modems, DCEs and DTEs. The four basic tests are:  
• local digital loopback (tests DTE send and receive circuits),  
• local analog loopback (tests local modem operation),  
• remote analog loopback (tests comm link to the remote modem), and  
• remote digital loopback (tests remote modem operation).  
Virtual Circuit: A logical connection. Used in packet switching wherin a logical connection is established between two  
devices at the start of transmission. All information packets follow the same route and arrive in sequence (but do not  
necessarily carry a complete address).  
RF300E/RF310E  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
W
Wide Area Network (WAN): 1. A network that provides communication services to a geographic area larger than that  
served by a local area network or a metropolitan area network, and that may use or provide public communication facilities.  
2. A data communications network designed to serve an area of hundreds or thousands of miles; for example, public and  
private packet-switching networks, and national telephone networks. Contrast with local area network (LAN).  
Wide Area Telecommunications Service (WATS): A low-cost toll service offered by most long distance and local phone  
companies. Incoming (800 call service, or IN-WATS) and outgoing WATS are subscribed to separately, but over the same  
line.  
X
X.25: ITU-T’s definition of a three-level packet-switching protocol to be used between packet-mode DTEs and network  
DCEs. X.25 corresponds with layer 3 of the 7-layer OSI model.  
Y
Yellow Alarm: An error indication sent by the T1 device when it has not gotten a receive signal, or cannot synchronize on  
the receive signal received. Contrast “Red Alarm” and “Blue Alarm”.  
Z
Zero Byte Time Slot Interchange (ZBTSI): A method for allowing 64K bps unrestricted user data (allowing all 0s in the  
user data). An alternative to (but not as popular as) B8ZS.  
196  
RF300E/RF310E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Overview............................................................ 74  
command string................................................... 165  
configuration commands  
Index  
modem............................................................. 169  
Configuration, management menu ...................... 105  
Configuration Port Setup ....................................... 36  
Configuration Utilities ............................................ 36  
Configuring  
A
Accessories, ordering.......................................... 112  
Address filtering .................................................... 59  
Applications setup ................................................. 71  
Applications, typical  
the Modem-Sharing Software ............................ 92  
Contacting technical support ............................... 111  
D
LAN-to-LAN routing ........................................... 49  
Remote Access Service (RAS) .......................... 38  
ASCII String .......................................................... 20  
AT commands ..................................................... 174  
modem...................................165, 168, 169, 174  
command editing .......................................166  
command structure ...................................165  
command summary...................................166  
configuration commands ...........................169  
data compression commands ...................173  
dial modifier commands ............................168  
dialing commands .....................................168  
error correction commands .......................173  
flow control commands .............................174  
functional mode .........................................165  
immediate action commands ....................175  
introduction................................................165  
modem response (result code) commands169  
online connections commands ..................171  
online mode...............................................165  
phone number memory commands ..........168  
recall commands .......................................169  
RS-232 interface commands.....................172  
wait-for-carrier mode .................................165  
Attribute values, Radius ........................................ 42  
Auto protocols, user permissions .......................... 28  
Auto-Protocol detection ......................................... 17  
Autoanswer ........................................................... 17  
Data  
protocol .............................................................. 17  
SPID .................................................................. 16  
TEI ..................................................................... 16  
data compression commands ............................. 173  
Data control ........................................................... 17  
Diagnostics, RASFinder ........................................ 71  
dial modifier commands  
modem............................................................. 168  
Dial-out, RASFinder management ...................... 105  
dialing commands  
modem............................................................. 168  
Dialing Method ...................................................... 17  
DNS....................................................................... 56  
Download Firmware .............................................. 36  
DTR dialing ........................................................... 17  
E
error correction commands ................................. 173  
F
Filtering, IPX packets ............................................ 62  
Filtering, remote user database............................. 26  
Filtering, spanning tree .......................................... 63  
Filtering, user permissions .................................... 26  
Filters, RASFinder ................................................. 59  
flow control commands  
B
modem............................................................. 174  
B-channel protocol ................................................ 17  
Bandwidth optimization ......................................... 62  
Bridging IPX packets ............................................. 62  
Building your remote user database...................... 27  
I
ICMP filtering......................................................... 60  
ICMP packet types ................................................ 60  
immediate action commands............................... 174  
Inbound user service type attribute, Radius .......... 42  
Installing TCP/IP (Win95/98) ................................. 82  
Installing TCP/IP (WinNT) ..................................... 89  
Internet  
C
Call control parameters ......................................... 17  
Callback-Delay attribute, Radius ........................... 42  
Calling line identification ........................................ 17  
Changing ProxyServer configuration, overview .... 36  
Client Setup........................................................... 74  
Configuring in Windows 95/98 ........................... 75  
Configuring in Windows NT ............................... 83  
Installing TCP/IP (Win95/98) ............................. 82  
Installing TCP/IP (WinNT).................................. 89  
Multi-Tech's Web site ....................................... 111  
IPX virtual port setup ............................................. 61  
L
LAN-based remote configuration......................... 102  
LAN-to-LAN routing ............................................... 49  
RF300E/RF310E  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RASFinder RF300E/RF310E User Guide  
Limited Warranty  
On-line Warranty Registration ......................... 110  
Modem-Based ................................................. 100  
Remote management  
Overview.......................................................... 104  
Telnet ............................................................... 104  
Remote user data base, RAS application ............. 43  
Remote user database, management menu ....... 105  
result codes  
modem............................................................. 181  
Rings to Answer option ......................................... 17  
RLogin, auto protocols .......................................... 29  
Roaming-Callback attribute, Radius ...................... 42  
Router Name ......................................................... 20  
RS-232 interface commands............................... 172  
M
Management, management menu....................... 105  
modem response (result code) commands ......... 169  
Modem-based remote configuration.................... 100  
MTASR3-200  
Accessories, ordering ...................................... 112  
RAS Client setup ............................................... 74  
RAS Dial-out Re-director ................................... 92  
Remote configuration....................................... 100  
Remote management ...................................... 104  
Typical applications............................................ 38  
Warranty, service, and tech support ................ 110  
MTPSR1-202ST  
S
S-registers  
Pre-installation considerations ........................... 16  
MTPSR3-200  
Changing the configuration, overview................ 36  
modem............................................................. 176  
assigning values........................................180  
AT commands that affect s-registers.........180  
reading values...........................................180  
Scripting  
N
Example........................................................... 117  
Service ................................................................ 111  
Setup Menu  
Network configuration considerations ................... 16  
Network switch types ............................................ 16  
Spanning Tree Setup ......................................... 62  
WAN Port Setup ................................................ 65  
Shared secret, Radius........................................... 42  
Shell user service type attribute, Radius ............... 43  
Software  
O
On-line Warranty Registration ............................. 110  
online connection commands .............................. 171  
Ordering accessories .......................................... 112  
Description......................................................... 36  
Spanning tree filtering setup.................................. 63  
Spanning Tree Setup............................................. 62  
SPID (service profile identifier).............................. 16  
P
Persistent DTR dialing .......................................... 17  
phone number memory commands  
modem............................................................. 168  
Port filtering ........................................................... 59  
PPP port setup ...................................................... 70  
PPP/SLIP, setup .................................................... 50  
Protocol permissions attribute, Radius .................. 42  
ProxyServer software ............................................ 36  
T
Technical support ................................................ 110  
TEI (terminal endpoint identifier) ........................... 16  
Telnet  
Cient ................................................................ 104  
RASFinder management menu ....................... 104  
TCP/IP stack.................................................... 104  
Telnet, auto protocols ............................................ 29  
Transparent bridging ............................................. 63  
R
Radius, defined ..................................................... 38  
Radius security service ......................................... 41  
RAS application  
Radius, using ..................................................... 38  
Remote User Data Base, using ......................... 43  
RAS Dial-Out Redirector  
Installing WINMCSI modem-sharing software ... 92  
Overview............................................................ 92  
Running WINMSCI workstation software........... 96  
Rate adaption protocol .......................................... 17  
recall commands  
modem............................................................. 169  
Recording RASFinder information....................... 110  
Remote Configuration  
U
Uninstall Proxy Server Configuration .................... 36  
User permissions, assigning ................................. 47  
User permissions, remote user database.............. 28  
V
Voice  
Directory number ............................................... 16  
TEI selections .................................................... 16  
LAN-Based ...................................................... 102  
RF300E/RF310E  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
W
WAN configuration, management menu.............. 105  
WAN Device Configuration.................................... 36  
WAN Port Setup .................................................... 65  
WEB browser management ................................ 106  
Windows sockets ................................................ 102  
WINMCSI modem-sharing software ...................... 92  
WINMSCI workstation software ............................ 96  
RF300E/RF310E  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Refrigerator KFN12923 SD User Manual
Miele Washer W 1612 User Manual
Milwaukee Cordless Saw 6527 User Manual
Murphy GPS Receiver PV1000 User Manual
NetComm Network Card NP730 User Manual
Ocean Electronic Electric Heater Tabletop Heater User Manual
Oster Griddle CKSTGRFM05 User Manual
Panasonic Fax Machine KX PW76CL User Manual
Panasonic Projector LX22 User Manual
Parkside Engraver PMGS 12 A1 User Manual